The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutResolution - 6419 - Contract - Art Cuevas Construction - Renovate Flight Standards Office - 06_24_1999Resolution No. 6419 June 24, 1999 Item No. 42 113 BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract to install and furnish all materials and services as bid for the Renovate Flight Standards District Office, Lubbock International Airport, between the City of Lubbock and Art Cuevas Construction, and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 24th day of _ June A 4 1999. 1 &' )AA Y SIT N, M OR ATT ST: . 1 64!�2 Ln�k-� Kaythi arnell City Se tart' APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: vl�du' Victor Kilm , Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney rkb/ccdocs/Art Cuevas Construction.res June14,1999 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT BID #99114 ..,,(/ &&I c ♦ � T O �� 11 CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas r ITB #99114, Addendum 04 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13'" STREET r LUBBOCK. TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us F r Y r ADDENDUM #4 ITB #99114 Renovate Flight Standards District Office, Lubbock Intemational Airport MAILED TO VENDOR: June 4,1999 CLOSE DATE: June 8, 1999 @ 2:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for In the ITB documents Is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain In effect. 1. ITB #99114 specifications are amended as per the attached document. A>I.�gc�ests fac drtlnal IalpG�u>ti�rdr�d�nommapd wtgie�ed to Helen Bums, Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Hbums@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY O LUBBOCK Helen Bums Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. A:199Addend199114ad4.doc 7 JUN— 3-99 THU 22:29 TISDEL AND ASSOCIATES 7975048 tisdej rninckler and associates archiet'ar�d engin�eejr•s June 4, 1969, t �R0 AR AODENPUM NK'. 4 RENOVATION$ TO: FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE (FSDO) LUBBOCt tMTRNA71t?NAL AIRPORT LUBBOCK, XAS 784Q1 4lE Of t [+NOTICE TO, ALL 13 )DERS ({ The following shall W,incorporated in and become a part of the original drawings and specifications of the above project. ; , GENERAL C4NSRUCTfOMTI i t;N1S --�-, 1. PRAWIN($. SKCIFICAMNS, Sheet A4 & Specifications Section 07552 Paragraph 2.3 SubparagFaph'C item— 2. The canopy roof area shall use 314" (minimum) thickness rlgW potylsocyanurate Insulatlon ba9rd instead of the 2.3" thickness speeied which is for the main roof area. site JOUST AVENUI° L(l V CIC TEM TIW1a TELEPHOHE� WG M - b2I PA)L- WG M ZM MWMBEAS OF THE AWWACAM INSTTUTZ Or AMWrCCTB 06-04-99 10:28 RECEIVED FROM:7975048 P.02 ITB 999114, Addendum #3 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13' STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #3 ITB #99114 Renovate Flight Standards District Office, Lubbock International Airport MAILED TO VENDOR: June 2, 1999 CLOSE DATE: June 8, 1999 @ 2:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for In the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. ITB #99114 specifications are amended as per the attached document. Questions may be faxed to or Email to: Helen Burns, Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806)775-2164 Hburns@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Helen Burns Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. A:199Addend199114ad3.doc JUN- 1-99 TUE .21:49 TISDEL AND ASSbtiATES 7975048 tis M,'I ickler and assqci arph(Wc ''' "Ad, �nolnqors June 1, 1999., ADDENDOM NO. 3 ReNOY''' "'tTO-. ATION PUGHT HT . $ . TAN i . )ARDS DISTRICT OFFICE (FSDO) ,,.RNATIONAL AIRPOR11- RQOI�g 3,'OC 389 0 LUPBOOK'tWS 79401 The foil* fiq'Oh�ll be IncorOrsjod In and Wome a part of the otlnl drawings and spacMcatioihs of the above QENg RU IO rIMM I. SOP-0 NP, Section 000,60 Carpet; under Part 2 paragraph. 2.1 A, ohoulO read as follows; 2.1 �rpet A. P,'rpdt; U: Subject JQ mrnpraina with requirements, provide one of the followind, .,I" tA)bs Corrvnerclaj Carpet, FaWfty fV a. Color. #4017 Lagoon Blue Mohawk CoMmerclall Carpet, Nova It with MmA Porformance Sydern backing. b, Color: #510 Indtlo P. 02 -PM FA*:* 4— —0 A!r ii 06-02-99 09:48 RECEIVED FROM:7975048 P 192 I ITS #99114, Addendum #2 7 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13' STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us 4 ADDENDUM #2 ITB #99114 Renovate Flight Standards District Office, Lubbock International Airport MAILED TO VENDOR: June 1, 1999 OLD CLOSE DATE: June 1, 1999 @ 2:00 p.m. NEW CLOSE DATE: June 8, 1999 @ 2:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). {� Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not F affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 7 1. The bid close date has been changed from June 1, 1999 @ 2:00 p.m. to June 8, 1999 @ 2:00 p.m. 2. ITB #99114 specifications are amended as per the attached document. .. #�►1I >•eqc e t fv dd)i�08I Mfaml 0100 gr:�c Ar . 0atian. ; i � ; ub�r31 #t ` rl snit dlrepted fo Helen Bums, Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 F Questions may be faxed to: or Email to: (806)775-2164 Hbums@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF .• / Helen Bums Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. FA:199Addend199114ad2.doc I PIAY-31-99 MON 2 ; 1:.09 TISI.)EL AND ASSOCIATES 7975048 tiS0 46- I .. 004 . I Julie il IQ APD�t ip so, clates 004., YO: MtkidT OPHOP (FSDO) JNTP NA'OON At'AIAPORT �Q 309 10 A ?0401 P. 02 The rol(pv�pg shall 1)0 JnWrporatkl,In, NO become a piatt of the orOnal drawings And sMcificiloone of the abovi , ct I. sP Oarpet, under Part 2 paragraph 2.1 A, should read as fol;ov4; ek, F!CATP,N, .0 241 14r t A.:. pr6duoA: Sot 10 lo,j:ornplian66 with roquiroments, prWde one of the jollQWng: 1. Lmm CO1 , rcyi ll C -OrPe t Faculty (V �,061or; #4 Pt7, "Wn Blue 2. rolla) Ci rpot Nova 11 00 "N( A4, Svty of Work p9to #3 should read as fp1lows; 4h 6'*'*o �**q shoat as 0opecifiecl 1� a=qrdql�m with nlan4factums Mc 1.0. ,Onqme o64 tb, 1.0ht weight cgncrsu deck and hot mop 2.3" thick polyisbcyariurate InOUfalion WO I rd f bai4 y6n6rig'shpat. 3, PR4o 'a" h tdA�4q Ejlesilty Ailg4h&t 5�a/A�4hat creokdram dshocvkft a mete! do* WNincorrect. q644. Dm�osl A4, ftclf PON Tho 00tall Mforonpas alorV the soAaast roof edge betwoon the d%6644 'rj*a),roqf vroa should read 3/A4 rW2/A4. S. 10090100A �raprliph U 0. add the fql1ipvApq subparagraph IA. MONSt f4oW7§$,2 M 0k; Mocfist� oally aftach TAMKOs VAPOR -CHAR bass ply shoat to nq In mocorclanoe, with rnanufsctuees'ricdihmendmtons. 09: 07 RECEIVED FROM:7975048 P-62 M City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13'" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us r ft ITS #99114, Addendum /l ADDENDUM #1 ITB #99114 Renovate Flight Standards District Office, Lubbock International Airport MAILED TO VENDOR: May 19, 1999 CLOSE DATE: June 1,1999 @ 2:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. ITB #99114, Renovate Flight Standards District Office, Lubbock International Airport, Is amended as per Attachment 1 of this document. Alf IragEests fir add�trQnl infc�rmattnn gr ctrit`irafic�n rrltst Dp su�mttted in wifting;>nd directed toy Helen Bums, Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Hbums@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK jc,� 44,� Helen Bums Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. A:199Addend199114ad 1.doc F 9 CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 99114 PROJECT NUMBER: 254.1524.06554 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT r ,` 4 1. 2. 3. 4. r 5- l- 6. 7. 8. 9. r 10 1 INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS No Text r 7 NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #99114 Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 1st day of June, 1999, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE, LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 24th day of June, 1999, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th r. Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or su erior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on 18th day of May, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Blue Room - LIA, Lubbock, Texas Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK V VICTOR KIL AN PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806) 775-2167/Fax (806) 775-2164. I No Text GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SCOPE OF WORK 4 The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE, LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. I*" I 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS 4 It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: HELEN BURNS BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806) 775-2164 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 90 (NINETY) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited -' to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants the year 2000 calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, —" and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES r It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by j Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. . 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and r shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of d barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of ` acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES i The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from tr the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. in addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given 3 C sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their. property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the r work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All --. policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. — The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof —` of coverage insurance documents Including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from -- compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is -- approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must _ notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's -- Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 4 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the �., work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly r authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (b) (c) r (d) (e) M (9) Notice to Bidders. General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder's Submittal. Statutory Bond (if required). Contract Agreement. General Conditions. Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to — complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 1 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. _ 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. """ No Text BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: DATE: try - `? - Cl 9 PROJECT NUMBER: #99114 - RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE, LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT Bid ofAZ C:is Co-n S T (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a t"_ 5 iOCI having carefully examined the.plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and ail other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: SERVICES: 2 Z. ) f TOTAL BID: e...4. (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 90 (NINETY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $300 (THREE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock In an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter Into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond In the sum of Dollars ($ 1, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid Is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned falls to execute the necessary contract documents, Insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. r- Aut izad Zeigrlre 4- d[LS (Printed or Typed Name) 0-? C 7 Cornrnpany 4b6 S3 Rn Address L.t.c A3,"Sac IC L� ii �3oc -1 City, County 11 , 79 y2 y State Zip Code Telephone: VCL - Y 6 Co - T60 0 Fax: Eck - G6-9 f Oa (Seal if Bidder Is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date BID OR PROPOSAL BOND r l ALL Mw BY THESE PRESENTSt That we, ART CUEVAS CONSTRUCTION, INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal,. and wASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Arizona, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of TEXAS as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK• (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the just and full sum of ' FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID ---------- ---------- -- ---- Dollars ($ lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and each of our successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly be these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit the Obligee a bid or proposal for the RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL'AIRPORT BID #99114 in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefore. . Now, THEREFORE, if, the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee,. and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of'said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void: otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Principal and said Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed this 8TH day of .TUNE , 19 99 . r BDB 600201 F ART CUEVAS CONSTRUCTION, INC. By WASHINGTON Il�iTSRN�ONAL URANCE CO KEVIN DUNN ATTORNEY=IN-FACT r WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY r POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona, and having its principal office in the Village of Itasca, Illinois does hereby constitute and appoint r.. HOWARD COWAN, KEViN DUNN AND MARLA HiLL EACH IN THEIR SEPARATE CAPACITY its true and lawful adorney(s)-In-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and au bonds and undertakings, recognizances, r"'contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may be allowed, required, or permitted by law, statute, rule, regulation, contractor otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said Washington International Insurance Company as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same has been duty executed and acknowledged by its President and its principal office. This Power of Attorney shall be limited In amount to$5,500,000.00 for any single obligation. This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to authority granted by the resolutions of the Board of Directors adopted March 22, 1978, July 3, 1980 and October 21, 1986 which read, in part, as follows: 1. The Chairman of the Board, President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary may designate Attomeys4n-Fact, and authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds, and undertakings, recognizances. !.- contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof and to appoint Special Attorneys -in -Fact, who are hereby authorized to certify copies of any power -of -attorney issued in pursuant to this section andlor any of the By -Laws of the Company, and to remove, at any time, any such Attomey-in-Fad or Special Attomey-in-Fact and revoke the authority given him. 2. The signatures of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary, and the corporate seal of the Company, may be affixed to any Power of Attorney, certificate, bond or undertaking relating thereto, by facsimile. Any such Power 1 of Attorney, certificate bond or undertaking bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal affixed in the ordinary course of business shall be valid and binding upon the Company. IN TESTIMONY WHO( 90Fjth*, q ashington International Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and its corporate seal to be affixed by its auLoragigWrli (�19th day of May, 1997 WA N INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY J, Steven nde on, Vice -President STATE OF Iff:*)OiS ZO��' `,,`',�� COUNTY OF CCfbfiirrau,r++'+`� On this 19th day of May.1997, before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument; to me personally known, and, being by me duly sworn, said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the Washington International Insurance Company, that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seat of said Company, IN n to s nd and aff ed my al al, day and year first above written. OFFICIAL SEAL" MICHELLE HOWERTON Notary Public, State of Illinois My Commission Expires ON7199 chelle Howerton, to Pub c My Commission Expires ber 7.1999 CFRTiFIC TF STATE OF ILLINOIS) COUNTY OF COOK) I, the undersigned, Vrce-President of WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an ARIZONA Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY r,. that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains In full force and has nut been revoked, and furthermore that Article Ili, Section 5 of the By -Laws of the Corporation, and the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth In the Power of Attorney, are now in force. ` Signed. and seated in the County of Cook, Dated the 8TH day of JUNE 19 99 Ja�T aafp to ice -President r r t t, , r r' PERFORMANCE BOND ,t r r� { ,.. BDND CHECK . BEST RATM LtCENS WITEXAS,DATE'-BY' ,.I No Text PM BOND NO. S-700-7919 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE r" (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) l ART CUEVAS CONSTRUCTION, KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that INC . (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and (hereinafter called the Sure3es), as Sure tv(s are held and firm) bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ��E HUNDRETf S X 0 U ,qIlars ($ 164.394.14Lawful money of the United States for the paymi�iif whereo , e say nncipal an ure nd` hemseives, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the24TSlay of JUNE ,19_19to BID #99114 - RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE. LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 8TH day of JULY , 19 99 . WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE ANY ART CUEVASINC. Surety , Principal oe • By: By: itle) KEVIN . UNN(Title) ATTORNEY -IN -FACT By: (Title) By: (Title) 7 The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom an requisite notices may be delivered and on ,�: designates gQJ 9 tY Y q � Y whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY i^ Surety .By. itle) Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney • Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety.Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. r •• 2 0 BOND NO. 5-700-7919 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that ART CUEVAS CONSTRUCTION, (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as INC. Principal(s), and WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY (hereinafter called the Surety(,, as Sure E�(s; are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), In the amount of ' H SIXTY FOUR THOUSAND 99emselves, lars ($ 164, 934.1§ lawful money of the United States for the paym , s i re i and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 24THday of JUNE ,19 99,to BID 199114 - RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE. LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that If the said Principal shall pay all `., claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said i contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined In accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if It were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and seated this instrument this 8TH day of JULY 1919 WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL 'By:, 0 ATTORNEY -IN -FACT ART CUEVAS CONSTRUCTION. INC. Principal By: itle) By: (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates HOWARD COWAN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE C ANY Surety C By: Me) REVIN DUNK ATTORNEY —IN —FACT Approved as to form: City of Lubbock City Attorney • Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety. Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 E .� IMPORTANT NOTICE t. r To obtain information or make a complaint: I. You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY r. POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Washington International insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona, and having its principal office in the Village of Itasca, Illinois does hereby constitute and appoint HOWARD COWAN, KEVIN DUNN AND MARLA HILL EACH IN THEIR SEPARATE CAPACITY its true and lawful attorney(s)4n-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may be allowed, required, or permitted by law, statute, rule. G regulation, contract or otherwise, and the execution of such kmstrument(s) In pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said Washington International Insurance Company as fully and ampy, to ell intents and purposes, as If the same has been duty executed and acknowledged by its President and its principal office. r- r This Power of Attorney shall be limited In amount to $5,500,000.00 for any single obligation. This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to authority granted by the resolutions of the Board of Directors adopted March 22, 1978, July 3, 1980 and October 21,1986 which read, in part, as follows: 1. The Chaimman of the Board, President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary may designate Attorneys -in -Fact, and authodze them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds, and undertakings, recognizances, r„ contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory In the nature thereof, and to appoint Special Attorneys -in -Fact, who are hereby authorized to certify copies of any power-of-attomey issued in pursuant to this section andlor any of the By -Laws of the Company, and to remove, at any time, any such Attomey4n-Fad or Special Attomey4n-Fad and revoke the authority given him. 2. The signatures of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary, and the corporate �' seal of the Company, may be affaed to any Power of Attorney, certificate, bond or undertaking relating thereto, by facsimile, Any such Power ofAnomey, certificate bond or undertaking bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal affixed in the ordinary course of business shaft be valid and bindiing upon the Company. IN TESTIMONYW WOPIthq, t ashington International Insurance Company has caused this Instrument to be signed and its corporate seal to be affixed by its au�161$er�. ffr'J 9th day of May, 1997 W N INTERN TIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OM iZ zy IP Steven de on, Vice-president 'y••�. .� ,++ COt1NTY FSTATE OF tam�as .RiZONP�r`��, gt+sur,3st�" r" On this 19th day of May,1997, before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and, being by me duty swom, said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the Washington international Insurance Company, that the seal affixed to said Instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, IN T to s nd and a d my ial al, day and year first above written. r OOFFICiAL SEAL" MICHELLE HOWERTON Notary Public, State of gl'u>ois My Corrurisslon Expi= 09/0 O chelle Howerton, to Pub c My Commission Expires-Sreptdriber 7,1999 STATE OF ILLINOIS) COUNTY OF COOK) I, the undersigned, Vid--President of WASHiNGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY. an ARIZONA Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force and has not been revoked, and furthermore that Article III, Section 5 of the By -Laws of the Corporation, and the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth In the Power of Attorney, are now In force. t Signed and sealed in the County of Cook. Dated the day of DULY .19 99 Jamet-A''arpenter ice -Press ent No Text Home Builders Insurance Program Post Office Box 10197 Jacksonville FL 32247-0197 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE This certificate is provided as evidence of insurance under Policy # BR96789087_of the Company Named Herein. EOSS PAYEE INSURED Name and Address Name and Address City of Lubbock PO Box 2000 Lubbock TX 79457 Art Cuevas Construction 7406 83rd St Lubbock TX 79424 Amount of Coverage Per Bldg Premium Effective Date ate Term (Completed Value) $164,934.16 $TBD Construction Began) 7-8-99 12 Months Description and Location of Property to be Insured: LOC: Job #99114 - Renovations fo the Flight Standards District Office Lubbock International Airport, Lubbock TX This is to certify that the above is insured under a Builder's Risk policy issued by a Maryland Casualty Company, covering property identified above from the inception date shown, subject to all terms and conditions contained in the policy. Insurance as provided under the aforementioned policy is subject to all terms, conditions and limitations thereof and shall in no event extend beyond date of termination of the Insured's interest in the articles described herein. Dated Authorized/Agent - A i, WARNING This Certificate is issued to protect the loss payee only. Under the terms of the Insured's policy, Insured agrees to report all starts and pay the appropriate premium to the Home Builders Insurance Program, P.O. Box 10197, Jacksonville, FL 32247-0197. Insured must report all starts shown on this certificate prior to the end of the next month. If Insured does not report within this time period, the insured will not be covered. r Insured should check with his HBIP agent to make sure he understands his reporting requirements. 6 f AGENCY Bledsoe Insurance Agency �- PO Box 65028 Lubbock TX 79464-5028 Agency 99149 .- MARYLAND CASUALTY COMPANIES C ILDpP�fPIZ R, JLL-13-1999 07:37 FROM BLEDSOr: INS. Ljb8ocK, TEX T'0 ?752164 P.01 - 7 �QdWD�M�f � 9i �> 0 � ... PRODUCER TiiRS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Bledsoe Insurance Agency, Inc.ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 9 HOLDER THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 5143 69th Street ALTER THECOVERAGE AFFORDED 8Y THE POLICIES BELOW. P.O. Box 65 028 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE Lubbock, TX 79464 COWlEAW A Assurance Com0any of America Art Cuevas Construction, Inc. B Security ati Aal Ins. Co. COMPANY 7406 83rd St Lubbock, TX 79424 C CaMPAW 0Milli- cfpW TKM 18 TO CERTFY TWAT THE POLICIES OF MURANCE WTED BELOW HAVE DGM ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD VOCATED, NO'TWITHSTANDWG ANY REWREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY =9RWT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH ra$ CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTARV, THE INSURANCE AFF=ED BY THE POMM DESCAAMW HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND 0ON01710N3 OF $ITCH POLIC1i UMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED Sy PAID CLANS. LR 1 TTPE OF mmVPjWCE POUGY NumseA POLICY EF'FEtiMn 0AA1E aiI4 DWM POLICY EMPA71011 ATE Q1lI1 11i LIMITS GENFRAL.LLABIll GD4EPAL.AGWIli 1 2,000,0001 A QofMMmA4oENmRALUA941T' SCP30734728 12/20/98 12/20/99 x PAoouCrs-CONb'IOPA[io a 1000,0001 CLNMS mm x 1 CC= PERFiOIVW. &ACIV IhUURY ! 500,0001 CWNM3sCON7RACMRSPa0r 8WHOOmsmeNIX s 500,00 Floe DAMAGE 4V+r one wej S 50,000 ii sm ii ONE" I 5 00 E Arrc>soe+LEUA43am X AWAUTO TCA2988079 08/19/98 08/19/99 S0010010 BODILY _ AM O►NNM AV= SQL AUTOS 714 li MAE mT= N01144WNEOALl PRDPFR7Y DAMAGE E QAP"UM§JTY AUICCNLY•EAAC n1i S CTNER THAN AU'Ib OM.Y: APIrA= EACH AOpDENT ! AO(#' MTE _ UIC'mLVZLITY f11 mCCCLSWO CE $ A00ni TE LA1OF0.L.A FOPM S OTHPJ4 TWIN tArffi14EW+Forw WOnnKl<RS CW.I.PtlENSATiOx AND x:Y1°t.q>tR.tr>r;. ✓.YMt.iw.' _.. ' CwIAI�t `-..RAM E7.EAC:+ACC>DEN7 L 7714E PR IOR/ Ill F1E7fCL B.Gi�- POLICY UKT S EL 11i - EA EAO'[DYEE t CFFlCEAS AM- OTHf9t DE901il OH C! OPZRAT10h3AOCd nrm The City of Lubbock is an additional insured on general liability and auto liability policies. A waiver of subrogation applies to auto and eneral liabilit licies. Job 199114 and g99147. 11i Nff OF TkE Al OESOREM 1OLCM BE CAxc6LLt,EO Mom wg EMRATKIN DATE TAMWF. 714E ISSa= COMPANY MRL DMEANOR 70 UM City of Lubbock Texas 1D_ 11i WRITTa:It 1i TO VT CMnFI U FtO = NUAM TO THE LEFT, PO Box 2000 W FAnXM TO Al XW:H *a= SWIL WPM x0 COUGATION OR UAWUTY Lubbock, TX 79457 of Waco An nT -MOP . ARiVM OR a»sWA-nVM � I TnT" P S1 07-13-99 08:24 RECEIVED FROM: ++++896+794+9276++++ P-91 A r F r r I r r F 7 7, 7, CORD . ... ..... 07/08/99 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION PRODUCER Bledsoe Insurance Agency, Inc. 5143 69th Street ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OF ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE P.O. Box 65028 COMPANY Lubbock, TX 79464 AAssurance Company of America INSURED COMPANY Art Cuevas Construction, Inc. BSecurity National Ins. Co. COMPANY 7406 83rd St Lubbock, TX 79424 C COMPANY D THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MMIDDIM POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM/DDtffl LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1,000,0 A x commertALGENERAL LIABILITY S C P 3 0 7 3 4 7 2 8 12/20/98 12/20/99 momcm - comp/op Arm s 1000,0 CLAIMS MADE Fx OCCUR PERSONAL & ADV INJURY S 500,OC EACH OCCURRENCE S 500,0C OWNERS & CONTRACTORS PROT FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S 50,0C MED EXP (Any one person) S 5,0C B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANYAUTO TCA2988079 08/19/98 08/19/99 COMBINED SINGLE UMIT S 500,0 X_ BODILY INJURY (Per person) ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per &=Ideno FARED AUTOS NON-OWNEDAUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE S GARA12E LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: ANYAUTO EACH ACCIDENT I AGGREGATE S EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGATE UMBRELLA FORM $ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATION AND I TA WUM% EL EACH ACCIDENT EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL PARTNERSAD(ECUTI'VE R EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S OFFKXJ:S A EXCL OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONi7;tICLESMPECM ITEMS The City of Lubbock is an additional insured on general liability and auto liability policies. Job #99114 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR,TO MAIL City of Lubbock Texas ID__ uys WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, PO Box 2000 BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR UA131UW Lubbock, TX 79457 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESEN Tr .......... I F 7, 7 F 7 r . 1FI PRODUCER -IF" g 799/ THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Bledsoe Insurance Agency, Inc. 5143 69th Street ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. P.O. Box--65028 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE Lubbock, TX 79464 COMPANY A Zurich Insurance Co. INSURED COMPANY City of Lubbock B PO Box 2000 COMPANY Lubbock, TX 79457 C COMPANY I D THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED 08 MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POUCY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DDrM POUCY EXPIRATION DATE (MMIDDNY) umrm GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE s 300,0 x commERcmLGENERAL uAeuTY Binder 07/08/99 07/08/00 PRoDucm - oomPA)p AGG s CLAIMS MAX 7 OCCUR PERSONAL & AN INJURY 9 EACH OCCURRENCE S 300,OC X OWNER'S & CONTRACTORS PROT FIRE DAMAGE (Any one ffre) $ MED EXP (Any one person) S AUTOMOBILE LIABIUTY COMBINED SINGLE UMrT S ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accideno $ HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: ANY AUTO EACH ACCIDENT S AGGREGATE $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE 8 AGGREGATE UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EF51YTA LIMITST I TN EMPLOYERS'LIABIUTY EL EACH ACCIDENT S EL DISEASE - POLICY UMFT I THE PROPRIETOR! NC L PARTNEFSAD(ECUTiVE REXCI- EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ OFFICERS ARE: OTHER DEscmpnoN OF OPEPATIONSA.00AnONSIVEMCUE"PECL6.L ITEMS Certificate holder is designated contractor on OCP Policy. Job #99147 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL Art Cuevas Construction 1_0, DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED To THE LEFT, 7406 83rd St BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE No OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY Lubbock, TX 79424 OF ANY 100b UPON. THE COMPANY, AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORJIMD R II �11SENT F 7 r F r 7 F r-� t 6 r i 4 r F r 7 } k f' x? DATE M ro D AGORD :$: �. :. :.::. r.:::. ... :.. :.}:.:::.a.::.}is�>}::::.:::..�.::.:r:::::.;:.Y}::.i}}:.:�}}}:}}:<•:,:�}>:<.;}:�}}}}:.}'.}.>}}>::•}»}:::{::<.:}}}}•r.. r.r....:.r.r.....r.r.......': : .............. Y X•+ Flf.�'07/08/99 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Bledsoe Insurance Agency, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OF 5143 69th Street ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW, P.O. Box 65028 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE Lubbock, TX 79464 COMPANY A Assurance Company of America INSURED COMPANY Art Cuevas Construction, Inc. ElSecurity National Ins. Co. 7406 83rd St COMPANY Lubbock, TX 79424 C COMPANY D �.j'�TM�/�.�..��:�::;i:t�i'}i>.�:�i:'$:i .'$. rirr::}?:>;:;:tir }. :. _: $:':...{'r,::jv:•lrl.:.. 5 .?•:vv: •: L::Y.:}: {iii.';$:y}Y;ii n{..'.• Ar:....}::d;a.., .... .y}...... .n+ :: v:r :... I:+'i4} .. .... %.:....... ....4: v: .:::::...::.:.::n.:,. ::vnvnw;..:v}: rr:{•.:.•:.::: .[•r�.•::• n..{..... r. n.rJ...•. rF. }...:... xn.. %1.,...1. .. r. �.n•SS..n....r. C x}•. vv: •: ::•-.v:; •...}I.i::}•• rn... .....•......; ..,.., �:;}�i :rl r.0 ........ }. .. r.•. r/.•na..v..G$:...:}....L..v:C.{,:.....a•.•...v...,..xy}.....n}.vn.,.::.:.:.n•.:.Yn.a.Jn:f:iSv%i!:<{{.:i.}}%-0:i::i{r:. .::_ THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLIDATE (MM/DD/YY) CTIVE PDATTEE EXPIRATION G1D� D/Yn LIMA GENERAL LIABILITY GENERALAGGREGATE : 1100010 C A x Comma& GENERAL LIABILITY CLAMS MAW ❑X OCCUR S C P 3 0 7 3 4 7 2 8 12 / 2 0/ 9 8 12 / 2 0/ 9 9 PRODUCTS - Comp/op Am s 10 0 0, 0 C PERSONAL A ADV INJURY S 5 0 O O C EACH OCCURRENCE S 500,0C OWNER'S rL CONTFWCTOMS PROT FIRE DAMAGE one fire) $ 5 0 O C MED EXP (Any one person) s 5,0 C B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO TCA2 9 8 8 0 7 9 0 8/ 19 / 9 8 0 8/ 19 / 9 9 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT S 500,00 BODILY INJURY (Per pe—) S ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Paraccidenq S HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNEDAUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE S GARAGE LJABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY ANY AUTO EACH ACCIDENT S AGGREGATE S EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S AGGREGATE f UMBRELLA FORM S OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATION AND A 1 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 0. EACH ACCIDENT i EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S THE PROPRIETOR/ 94CL PARfNERS/EXECUTIVE EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ OFFICERS ARE: EXCL OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/L=T1ONS/VEHICLES/SPECML ITEMS The City of Lubbock is an additional insured on general liability and auto liability policies. Job #99147 �.�y.�� .....:. :•;; ..:: •:/ :..::::. •:: r:::::::x ::n.: .::: ......:...: .....::•}: .:: •.: •::: x:Y. •:: ....::.•. •yyyy .. :: //yy1��.,,..��..�M.�V�R}:•V ....... .ry .:..•.v.•. x: •::::::. ...... n..v:rw:. 4• }}.... \Y. .....::: :\RFS�F/x7.VAt�� ......... ♦ . ... .. $ :...Y r .: d k:: n•::: mr.•::.v::.v:.vx: r.•rv::: mnv,....... r. }r$. nvv.{+j.41. fr, n r/.•}:•:....vriv..4...vvvlr$..•..... x. n:. r.: r.�.iE:w�•.v:uvr.•. rif{4.w .. : :v: •:::vY}-}+ •. .:•:{.......; .. h...:.:_%v:}>.::2k:iitc:}::i:�$:�:: Y:`}:¢:-S}: •. •{{r--'y,;: :r v: x: rw.vw:::::: .u::.v: nv: YY.{Lw::: M N.x:..{ iG{ fi•$: }}.$::.{i•}:-}isCYX•}:O$::iiitbr:•4.:.2i6.{-}.+.i+i{i•KY: }}}%:.i.�r}rr::: x::::::. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL city of Lubbock Texas 1Q_ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT. PO BOX 2000 BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY Lubbock, TX 79457 OF ANY KIND U N THECUMPANY. JR:�LAWNTS, R REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPR T A :..: :•;. •, n..:: :.v�•:x.:::w:::::: :w:r, a.•n+-:r x:r:: rvn:•:; .rrx.••x::.v: r:nvxv;: :.:: .. ..•.: ..: .. ...:•: nn.. vvv•.i'l.:•ry'll.}v.S:r:}'.:xn..}:r!.}.••.•..:nS:. 1.tCcAC3..>:::>::: .�x.}Yi.}:^:.^S}h}G?•;.^'xr. I.. JUN-01-1999 10:51 FROM BLEDSOE INS. LUBBOCK, TEX TO E3669100 P.01 r . N i DATE (MM/CONY) ACRD-. 1r F � � .+ M O ,�. w.:0+ '.. ...., .. .,. .... ... ..S .< } 1PROCUM} w<.3T S fi Nw1J' D D ,..M .F, {�r.., Yyk•9I 03 7.1 99 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ncy, Inc. sz�aGo� Insurance Agency, ONLY,AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 5143 6 9 t h Street ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW, P.O. BOX 6 5 0 2 8 COMPAMES AFFORDING COVERAGE _ .. _ _ _ Lubbock, TX 19464 _ . a Assuranc.E. -Com an of America. .._....p.._.Y._.. f u+xuaFo crnnrANY 1 Art Cuevas Ccnstructicn, Inc. g Security. Nati.,onal..i_ns,. Co. 7406 8 3 rd St co�roAn� ' Lubbock, TX 79424COMPAW c D F' ` ` S.�>vk '' .y.4< <K MS<,t '6'^K ro ...,.,. -. }r k. cl•�u r o rnun. u�ODx a:D,zK'J•!*m Kw �«» < ..• :<a. THIS IS TO CEFMFY THATTHEPOLICIES OF INSVRANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BECN ISSUED TO THE INSIIREO NAMED ABOVE ORH E PoticY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITIOU OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY 8E ISSVEO OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES OESCRIBEO HEREIN IS SUBJECT T'O.ALL THS TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS, CO TYPE Of INSURANCE �oUCYNUMBER LTR ROLJCYEFiEOTTUE POLICYEXItiRA1T011 LIMI" I)AT41MM1DWM I DATE PUAM0^ GENERAT,UADILITY •__:•�� (�EroEaAc.ne eseonrE 11 000I' 9.Q_. A COMbIERCALGENEMLUASILln' $CF3073472$ 12/20/98 77,./20/99 _ .I= pr+obs TS•COWICIPAvo S 100a, 00 vmlEq R ice I x I« i ParALa nov IN xv s 5 0 0 R.0 0_ a ► c WINC-oRsx rpw j tAC++oCCVP&*NM s 500,00( f i rtm OAMACc (Any W* at) ! S 0, 0 0 I MEC EXo a>xn o�) s 51 0 4 I AVTOMOSILE UAMUM B AWAUTO TCA2988079 108/19/98 � 08/19/99 COMEUNEO SIN3LE LM,irt _ f $00, 00 AU N'NCI) Atln r RC11 VV..O AUTCS { 4 ! BoULY fiV iVf3v S ff i MMOAVTW j j ( �..... 1i001LY RJR IaY i . I t NoN.OWNFO ALIT CS (P- 0MR56m) l � rsICI+ERTY CAMAf+F i QAAWUAS UTY i AM CKV -EAApCIp:NT ANY AUTO i 07MER rWN AUTO CNLr: _ ACipfiC-(RATE S VMS% UARILITY { EACH 0= Im N= t IE44ELLA FCM I AGGREGATE (; OTC THAN UMWMLLA FOMA S WORKERS COMPENSATION ANO EMPLOYER4' LIMLIT1' c EL EACH ACCIOENT S T pQQPRipTppl _ t � PARTNE�rEXECUfnrE EL O*EAM • P%ICV um s . OFFICERS ARE: EXCL EL OL4FILSE • EA EMPLOYEE t vTNER I � ii I (OE9CaIPTiOH Or OPEI7A7wMS/tOCATIONSiYEMiCLES.;PEF1nl rrEMS IlContractor . - y+� I� ,�:D.y.<. � <1Mw FW�R. a• v i•. �ke�YMWuku•<.'eif:Db st *�MCt< i ►tY YI-.�Wil�a'v. +.WI.D.M1. t+:Dr K..; T aA4�W:FV.,. .AS ..F•.CMR �).µ, viY.l .1D V:<4�1{��i.�i�� .Yn /.{� '� J tl n'+!'•A•rY bMR s.n�tKl�c.u++ww.fa�m seh x:w•s w•+ ...tea::. i'M9P„�wu,At.+eMa:M1<irH�Y� ^e",'xbi/� �'� #.v<1 $`�M^ y� 'I. ..% i f, � SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED VOMES BE CANCELLED RUM THE EXPIRATION DATE TIMMOF. THE 1 MIQ COMPAIIY WILL ENDEAVOR To MAIL City of Lubbock ID VAYS WRITM NOTICE To TI(E CERTIFICATE ROLM NAMED To r#q Mr, Building Inspection Dept oVT sAILUWs o MAIL SUCH NOTICE 6MALL WPO$t No OBLYGATlON OR LIAVIUTY PO BOX 2000 OR ANY D COMP AGENTS OR RF.PRESEHTATIVES. Lubbock, TX 79457 AVn4091 .S11 �. '�7�i��yryy�� > . f Y•� <+k •. ,L GN1�M'Dp • r { � y .p, ra 'w n < .,! .a . a a !. n � • +�, � •47.an.,+,m�..`.^+..v y,�y�yy� t�y� "�1'W.,�• i,., ^'F" ,�,..,..•r. ;, ,}, +�. :.,,;�t'q.. Y."iS:..ws<..r�'rf" �Y4WI.OJ��..F.7tliyy �y ,y��y TOTAL P.01 UO ul%8 Z: is rill 16UU794U11JU UAI lU 'lAilb wj V1 Am KIA.MwtSLwYr.w.r.�n��J: .�.�........ r.........,. ,W,�KWMK•MVt.xwvP.::•w•Lw.Y..w. DATE INSURANCE AGENCY � 5233 79T>3 LUBBOCK TX 79424 (806) 794-1177 Art Cuevas Construction Inc. 7406 83rd OATSPMUDL1" 1 06/01/99 r THIS CEFMFICATE 15 ISSUED AS A I ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS HOLDER. THIS, CERTIFICATE DOES COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A COMMERICAL CASUALTY INSURANCE CO COMPANY . 0 COMPANY C Lubbock TX 79424 COMPANY 1806 866-9000 r.6a•.>..v;.Li;Ek;�atw.'4edw.:.:wr`1i.,.v^st:ari�nwa.PaK� w6i'.•iN wWy.,,Pw.w ni.Ml:.a+e.;. to .....!v..�� rdi...i:"'.r•Pie.iW:wwiai.o�$,wwk:.{'.w..':, :y,..nOn+MiaY.M >„�[CO�:.iOtMMry'K YYIVD./tYY>S..:IMw.v.l9tM i.O.;A1lW.:,4�:.)tMe.w•nIM�W.'iMq N%OOKw1�hFMf' H�,:�WM>t" Nbd,;PMtM�Liaw�`�NM.WM N�•�Y.W,Pqvy.%MN.N . �, Y.91MM14.• P.ftM.%tPt �"..vr ItOdM1V WSW,' H9: 9tiq%PM•MP: •Y'�oMytVdkM+'lMN,9YK.%6iAfbfWI.tHIW.rArv,.wvnrwv.v.v...:'.'M+W.WmW.F1NpW.'4M-wwFNMgp.MNrt+MY'w'wrwi.vww+wwwnwwwwv.w..w.... THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF MURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWM-*TANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OA MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERM, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, UMrM SHOWN MAY tfAVE BEEN REDUCED 6Y PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OFMUWJME POuaYNUMBER I POLNIYEFFFCTTYE DATE (MMMMIM POI.ICYEXPIRAT= DATE IMNIIDDIYY) If Umm GENERAL u181LI'IY MMER(NALGENERABIL COM.0M' :` CLAW W40E El OCCUR O m l!" 9 CONTPACTCnS PROT R. I / / / / CENM;lAL G MAV_ i PR=J=-=MP/OPAd0 i P�ONALLAO5/14JURY E FACHOCCURPENCE I FIFE DAMAGE PLy we Are) I MED E'er om ww Comm) E ' AUTOMOBILE UABufTY ANYATO ALL OV&=AUTOS ECH6DULED AMUS WREDAUTC6 DOMED AUTM I ' COM&NmBWQLEUMR I PULP&WAJITY + 6oOtLYINJURY P,► aoC3dol0 E PROPERTYUMPOE I tARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO q / / I AUTO ONLY . EA ACC 09NT I OTHER THAIJAUTO ONLY. �:<';�x � ""s• EAZH ACQDENT I I ACIGAEGATE s Exf- LABILITY I j EACKOCOAIENM is _RUMBRELLA FORM ' OTHER TITAN UMBRE-LI A FOW A : WOMWO COMP'ENS MON AND 27APLOYERS'LIMLI"I J1054370C THE PROPRETORI WOL I r OFFCOMARE: E%CL OTHER r 04/27/99104/21/00 EACHA=0ENT CLSEME - PCUCY LIMIT CamlkSE-EA A EMPLOYEE DESMPTION OF OPEMTIOIct Es/SpECIAL I'mus pw WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ON WORK COMP IN FAVOR OF CITY OF LUBBOCK i i, r CITY OF LUBBOCK r. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79452 L SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES ME CAMCMM OUVI E IM EXPIRATION CAW rAMOF. THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL I=EAVOH TO MAIL __LQ GAYS NRrffu NOTICE m THE CERTIFICATE NONDER RAN= TO THE LEFT. BUT FAIWRE TO WUL SUCH NOTICE 6K4LL IMPM NO 09"TiON OR LIABILITY OF ANY K= LPON THE COMPANY. rF5 AGENTS OR WROUNTATN TL r F CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: �` 2 i REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. No Text FOR f A f {, CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS 7 COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 24t' day of June, 1999 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Art Cuevas Construction of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. 7 WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and d performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #99114 - RENOVATE FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE, LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT - $164,934.16 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. r The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have I been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. A The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. APPROVED AS TO FORM: Ci Attorney *., ATTEST: Corporate Secretary f ITA • - " , r/ " CONTRACTOR: ART C C TRUCTION By: PRINTEDNAME: 7 TITLE: . COMPLETE ADDRESS: Art Cuevas Construction 7406 831 Street Lubbock, Texas 79424 No Text r 4 G GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT r I: 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit ART CUEVAS CONSTRUCTION who has agreed to perform the work embraced 7 in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. 1OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative H. DAVID JONES, DEPUTY DIRECTOR, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. r 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to r herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". €` 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. r 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. — 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, Its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 71, r 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and . location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's �., Representative and Contractor. t r 3 Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or -- men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is — also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons -- competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 4 7 i l Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance r with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. r- 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be '.., required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, I alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. P^ In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph l shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, f together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by ., 5 them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the — type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands _ the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of _ bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 6 0 r"t 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shalt comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, & are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations ' Explosion & Collapse Hazard 1 Underground Damage Hazard r 7 Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $0.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of 1100 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the durationof the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to 8 _ 7, 7 provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and ` (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance — Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: -- (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. 10 r (8) If policy limits are paid, new policymust! be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and r (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of i coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the 4 current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one 7 year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "- "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your -- employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage; "and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll — amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that — the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the -- Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown — on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 12 F i (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. rM 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such r" individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES F Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of r machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract f and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or r waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. F31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION I~ The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patentor copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. ` Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or r required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the r" Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. ro r 13 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the — work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this — contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $300 (THREE HUNDRED — DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 14 ii 35. 36. 7 l 37. 38. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. r 4 t 15 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way -- encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. — 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. "- 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's — agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 16 F t" i. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final r completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or t warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK k Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative r., on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and i Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any F such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, E Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. t 17 i 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and fled with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner -` shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's -- Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR — In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. — After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any - machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will — ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with ` diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. 18 r In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in r., paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. i i 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY r' The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS 7 The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds C $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 19 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to - direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the -- City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project _ or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (1) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 20 r` !� t i' 4 i CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS I' I f. is .. t i NcSOxULlLou .A OLOa Item No. 39 RESOLUTION April 8, 1999 r WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of i Vernon's Ann. Civ. Art. 5159a; and r y WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted . February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, further updated by Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8, 1987, further updated by Resolution No. 5721 enacted March 14, 1996, and amended by Resolution No. 6138 enacted December 16, 1998; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and High%vay Construction Exhibit C: Overtime Rate Exhibit D: Legal Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this Sth day of April- 9 99. ;i WINDY SHTO, MAC II A EST: Kayt, t Damell, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Man- Ar, ews, Managing Director of Human Resources APPROVED AS TO FORM: Amy L/Sifns, Assistant City Attorney p ccdocs�ubworks.res March 25. 1999 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boder Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified Hourly Rate 11.50 12.50 6.25 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 8.00 11.00 13.75 7.00 9.50 8.50 9.50 10.50 11.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer -General Laborer -Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machine Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grader Operator Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver -Light Truck Driver -Heavy Hourly Rate 9.00 6.00 9.00 7.00 12.00 6.00 7.00 6.25 6.00 6.75 9.00 7.00 7.75 F.00 7.75 7.2'5 8.00 7.25 9.50 6.75 7.25 7.25 6.50 7.00 EXHIBIT C rPrevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. t, EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be.as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. r r No Text PROJECT MANUAL FOR RENOVATION TO: FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE (FSDO) CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT ROUTE 3, BOX 389 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 TISDEL MINCKLER AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS & ENGINEERS AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS April 1999 �ga SET NO. SPECIFICATIONS FOR: FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE (FSDO) RENOVATION CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT Route 3, Box 389 Lubbock, Texas 79413 APRIL 1999 TISDEL MINCKLER AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS 3416 Joliet Avenue Lubbock, Texas 79413 (806) 792-2824 Fax (806) 797-5048 AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 3223 S. Loop 289, Suite 424 Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 799-0753 Fax (806) 799-2014 I, TABLE OF CONTENTS RENOVATIONS FOR: *� FLIGHT STANDARDS DISTRICT OFFICE (FSDO) CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT ROUTE 3, BOX 389 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 April 1999 TABLE OF CONTENTS: The following is the enumeration of the Specifications, Drawings, and Addenda which form a part of this Contract as set forth in the General Conditions. BOUND HEREIN Page TitlePage....................................................................................................................................... 1 Tableof Contents........................................................................................................................... 1-4 DIVISION 0 OWNER'S BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Noticeto Bidders............................................................................................................................. 1 General Instructions to Bidders......................................................................................................... Bid Submittal Lump Sum Bid Contract 1 6 1- 3 PaymentBond................................................................................................................................. 1-2 PerformanceBond........................................................................................................................... 1-2 Certificate of Insurance............................................................................. - C Contract........................................................................................................................................... 1 GeneralConditions......................................................................................................................... 1-20 Current Wage Determinations........................................................................................................... 1-5 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section01100 Summary.............................................................................................................. 1-3 Section 01140 Work Restrictions.................................................................................................. 1-2 Section 01250 Contract Modification Procedures......................................................................... 1-2 Section 01290 Payment Procedures............................................................................................ 1-4 Section 01310 Project Management and Coordination................................................................. 1-4 Section 01320 Construction Progress Documentation.................................................................. 1-4 Section 01330 Submittal Procedures............................................................................................ 1-6 Section 01400 Quality Requirements............................................................................................. 1-4 Section 01420 References............................................................................................................. 1 r- TABLE OF CONTENTS i C. r r- TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 01500 Section 01600 Temporary Facilities and Controls.... . ' Product Requirements 1-8 1-6 Section 01700 Execution Requirements........................................................................................ 1-5 Section 01731 Cutting and Patching............................................................................................ 1-4 Section 01732 Selective Demolition.................................................................................... 1 7 Section 01770 Closeout Procedures 1-5 r„ DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION (This division not used.) r L , DIVISION 3 CONCRETE (This division not used.) r" DIVISION 4 MASONRY (This division not used.) DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings........................................................................................ 1-6 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry..................................................................................... 1-5 Section 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork........................................................................... 1-6 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07553 SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing ..................................................... 1 -10 Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim............................................................................. 1-6 Section07920 Joint Sealants....................................................................................................... 1-7 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Steel Doors & Frames........................................................................................... 1-4 Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors................................................................................................ 1-4 Section 08710 Door Hardware..................................................................................................... 1 -12 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies.................................................................................. 1-7 Section 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings..................................................................................... 1-7 Section 09651 Resilient Tile Flooring........................................................................................... 1-6 Section09680 Carpet................................................................................................................... 1-3 Section09900 Painting................................................................................................................. 1 -12 Section 09950 Wall Coverings...................................................................................................... 1-4 DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES Section 10100 Visual Display Boards........................................................................................... 1-4 Section 10155 Toilet Compartments............................................................................................. 1-5 Section 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories.................................................................................. 1-5 DMSION 11 EQUIPMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 l TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 11132 Projection Screens................................................................................................. 1-3 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section12541 Drapery................................................................................................................... 1-4 DMSION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (This division not used.) DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (This division not used.) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical........................................................................ 1 -13 15200 Piping and Accessories........................................................................................... 1-5 15210 Plumbing Systems.................................................................................................. 1-7 15260 Refrigerant Piping System .................................................................................. 1-2 15320 Air Distribution........................................................................................................ 1-4 15330 Hangers and Supports............................................................................................ 1-3 15500 Equipment............................................................................................................... 1-7 15600 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems ......................................... 1-2 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16000 General Provisions for Electrical........................................................................... 1-9 16060 Minor Electrical Demolition for Remodeling......................................................... 1-2 16110 Raceways and Fittings.......................................................................................... 1-8 16120 Conductors............................................................................................................. 1-4 16140 Wiring Devices...................................................................................................... 1-4 16180 Equipment Controls and Wiring Systems............................................................. 1-3 16195 Electrical Identification........................................................................................... 1-2 16441 Circuit and Motor Disconnect Switches.................................................................. 1-2 16450 Grounding and Bonding......................................................................................... 1-2 16470 Panelboards............................................................................................................ 1-4 16475 Circuit Disconnect and Overcurrent Protective Devices ......................................... 1-2 16500 Lighting................................................................................................................... 1-6 INDEX OF DRAWINGS Sheet Number Title ARCHITECTURAL: COVER Al A2 A3 A4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Project Title and Index to Drawings Floor Plan, Demolition Plan, Schedules and Details Reflected Ceiling Plan, Interior Elevations, & Millwork Details Interior Elevations and Roof Details Roof Plan and Details 3 t. TABLE OF CONTENTS MECHANICAL: M1 M2 M3 PLUMBING: P1 P2 ELECTRICAL: E1 E2 E3 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Floor Plan Mechanical Demolition Floor Plan Mechanical Mechanical Details Floor Plan Plumbing Demolition Floor Plan Plumbing Floor Plan Electrical Demolition Floor Plan Lighting Floor Plan Power TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 CCopyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 ro l SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specifications, General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of demolition and renovation of the Lubbock Texas offices of the Federal Aviation Administration. 1. Project Location: Flight Standards District Office, Lubbock International Airport, Rt. 3, Box 51, Lubbock, Texas 79401-9712. 2. Owner: City of Lubbock. Lubbock International Airport, Rt. 3, Box 389, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, excluding the "front end" documents of the Project Manual, dated April 1999, were prepared for the Project by Tisdel Minckler and Associates, Architects and Engineers, 3416 Joliet Ave., Lubbock, Texas 79413. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract as indicated by the Owner's Documents at the front of this Project Manual.. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work shall be conducted in Two (2) phases to be substantially complete within 90 days of the Notice to Proceed. Note that the Owner will continue to occupy the space during construction. During Phase One the currently occupied portions of the west half of the offices will be occupied. During Phase Two the newly renovated east half of the offices will be occupied. Refer to Drawings for specific locations. The Owner will be allowed time between Phase Number One and Phase Number Two to occupy the Phase One space and provide asbestos abatement work for Phase Two. 1. Phase Number One: This work includes roofing of the indicated portions of the building and demolition and renovation of those portions of the offices east on the east half of the project as indicated on the Drawings. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy prior to starting work on Phase Number Two. rr 2. Phase Number Two: This work includes demolition and renovation of those portions of the offices on the west half of the project as indicated on the Drawings. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within 90 days of the Notice to Proceed with Phase Number Two. 1.5 USE OF PREMISES SUMMARY 01100 -1 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 A. General: Owner will continue to occupy portions of the project throughout the construction process. The Contractor will notify the Owner in a timely manner prior to performing any work which may require shutting down utilities. The Contractor will also provide protection of occupied portions of the project by providing dust seals and temporary partitions. 1.6 OTHER WORK A. The Owner will provide his own work force to provide the Mechanical work for the Project. This work will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. B. Cooperate fully with the Owner's personnel so the Mechanical portion of the work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.7 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish all products for the Mechanical portion of the work. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's_ equipment including mechanical and electrical connections. Note that the Plumbing portion of the work is not by the Owner. 1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-fumished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 4. If Owner -furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. 6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner -furnished products. Using Owner -furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner -furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. 8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner -furnished items at Project site. 9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner -furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 10. If Owner -furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. SUMMARY 01100 - 2 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. The Owner has elected to provide his own "front end" documents rather than the standard AIA documents seen in most Project Manuals. These documents include the following: 1. Notice to Bidders 2. General Instructions to Bidders 3. Bid Submittal - Bid for Lump Sum Contracts 4. Payment Bond 5. Performance Bond 6. Certificate of Insurance 7. Contract 8. General Conditions of the Agreement 9. Current Wage Determinations B. The Architect is providing the remaining technical specifications and limited Division 1 specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100 - 3 r I Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 t" i SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to those areas indicated on the Drawings to be renovated and areas indicated for storage of equipment and materials. a. For that portion of the work which requires the removal and replacement of the fence separating the airport ta)away from the building, the Contractor will coordinate with airport security to have a member of his on site personnel deputized to provide securtiy during the time the gate/s are open, or the fence is down. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and rt available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. C. Parking and material storage space (stack lot) is indicated on Drawings. B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. 1. The Work will be performed in Two (2) Phases with the Owner occupying the Phase Two area during Phase One construction and will occupy the Phase One area during Phase Two construction. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment r in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not 7 interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. �, WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 -1 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems for that phase of the project shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 2 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 7, SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue, through Owner's Representative, supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner4nitiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 7 after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 -1 L"' Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade — discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2 FCopyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 r SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section included. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. i PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 -1 t Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. o. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the General Conditions. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the General Conditions. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 2 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit Three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 7. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. f c PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3 r i Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 4 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions (� and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. r• 1.2 SUMMARY & A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: r 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. r• 3. Coordination Drawings. i 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure ma)dmum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -1 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. -- 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. B. Preconstructon Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 7 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; major suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: _ a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Coordination of Mechanical materials & labor to be provided by Owner's personnel. d. Critical work sequencing. e. Designation of responsible personnel f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises. I. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. m. Parking availability. n. Office, work, and storage areas. o. Equipment deliveries and priorities. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 2 7 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 r { p. First aid. q. Security. r r. Progress cleaning. S. Working hours. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each �- construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Deliveries. d. Submittals. e. Possible conflicts. f. Compatibility problems. g. Time schedules. h. Manufacturer's written recommendations. I. Warranty requirements. j. Compatibility of materials. k. Acceptability of substrates. I. Space and access limitations. M. Testing and inspecting requirements. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting as necessary. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractors Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. r i, ; PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 3 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Access. _ 5) Site utilization. 6) Temporary facilities and controls. 7) Work hours. 8) Hazards and risks. — 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Change Orders. 12) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress _ meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 s SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule, 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Material location reports. 5. Construction photographs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two (2) printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two (2) printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black -line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. C. Construction Photographs are not required, but if the Contractor elects to use photo documentation of existing conditions submit two (2) prints of each photograph for the Owner's records. 1. Format: standard 3"x5" color photograph. 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name of Contractor. r CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -1 7 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 C. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, and direction (by compass point) of construction view taken. D. Material Location Reports: Submit two (2) copies at monthly intervals which may be included with Application for Payment. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Include the following: 1. Activity Duration 2. Procurement Activities 3. Submittal Review Time: Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 2 ( Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9W r4. Startup and Testing Time. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architects administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner -Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Submittals. b. Fabrication. C. Deliveries. d. Installation. e. Tests and inspections. f. Adjusting. g. Startup and placement into final use and operation. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 1. Completion of Phase One. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar -chart -type construction schedule within fourteen (14) days of date established for commencement of the Work. tl CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 3 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities, including phase completion, for the construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 REPORTS A. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule with each Application for Payment. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect[, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions I and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated -Design Submittals. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, Project Record �. Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. i. j 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. I: 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 7 i SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -1 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related _. construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 3. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4. Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. _ E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approArnately on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. -, d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. _ g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 LCopyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Contractor's choice. 4. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: Project a. name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. C h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. r" 1. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of r- construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections, 1. Number of Copies: Submit a sufficient number of copies of each submittal as necessary for Contractor copies, Architect's copy, any given Consutltant's copy/s and Owner's copy. Architect will return all copies, including Owner's copy (to be maintained by the Contractor for later delivery to the Owner), except for the Architect's copy and any copies kept by his consultants. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturers product specifications. C. Manufacturers installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturers catalog cuts. f. Wring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. 9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 7 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. _ I. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. M. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field4nstalled wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 2. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architects sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 F Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 5. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit at least one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect will retain two (2) Sample sets; remainder will be returned.] a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 7. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying . products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit a sufficient number of copies of each submittal as necessary for Contractor copies, Architect's copy, any given Consutltant's copy/s and Owner's copy. Architect will return all copies, including Owner's copy (to be maintained by the Contractor for later delivery to the Owner), except for the Architect's copy and any copies kept by his consultants. 2. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." I SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 C. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." D. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents:_ Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 L., t SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Speck quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. r C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are i used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will bejudged. FQUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 -1 E"" Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade -union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. 2. Notify testing agencies at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 B. Manufacturers Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's �^ responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction k that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, after, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar rquality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field -curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching:' B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9W 7 SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specked and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. L D. Abbreviations and Names: Abbreviations and acronyms are frequently used in the Specifications l and other Contract Documents to represent the name of a trade association, standards -developing organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity in the context of referencing a standard or publication. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of these entities. Refer to Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S.," which are available in most libraries. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 4 = END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420-1 r r. l Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 i SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. 3. Heating and cooling facilities. 4. Ventilation. 5. Electric power service. 6. Lighting. 7. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary roads and paving. 2. Project identification and temporary signs. 3. Waste disposal facilities. 4. Field offices. 5. Storage and fabrication sheds. 6. Lifts and hoists. 7. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Site enclosure fence. 3. Security enclosure and lockup. 4. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 5. Temporary enclosures. 6. Temporary partitions. 7. Fire protection. E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1 ; TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 -1 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1.3 DEFINITIONS _ A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Use Owner's existing sewer service without payment of use charges. C. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without payment of use charges. D. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, 'and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. a 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. — 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS r A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 P" Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. r PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm) OD corner and pull posts[, with 1-5/84nch- (42-mm-) OD top rails] [, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand]. C. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm) 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/84nch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/84nch- (73-mm) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide [concrete] [galvanized steel] bases for supporting posts. D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". E. Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less. F. Water: Potable. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Field Offices: Prefabricated or Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading. C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. r D. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 E. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Drinking -water fountains including paper cup supply. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked -in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. B. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. 2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. _ E. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. F. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 ' 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length -voltage ratio. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first -aid station. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Architect's office. *, d. Engineers' offices. e. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2.. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 5 r i. Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and _ equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. Insert local code references for environmental protection. Consider indicating hours when noisemaking activities are prohibited. B. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin install chain -link, or portable chain -link enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth. 2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. 3. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Coordinate with Owner's existing security measures. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/84nch- (16-mm-) thick exterior plywood. E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load -bearing, wood -framed construction. 4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire -retardant -treated wood framing and other materials. F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) studs, 5/8-inch (16-mm) gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch (13-mm) fire -retardant plywood on construction side. 2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 3. Seat joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 4. Protect air -handling equipment. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6 l Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 n� 3 G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. a. Feld Offices: Class A stored -pressure water -type extinguishers. b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry -chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recom mended classes for exposures. C. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure areas. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire -protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, i when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 7 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction — period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 8 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturers published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturers product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. D. Manufacturers Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. r` 4 , PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -1 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or ` fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. C. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test '— results for compliance with requirements indicated. f. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. g. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. h. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within seven (7) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 MASTERSPEC 9/98 t Copyright 1998 AIA 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. N 8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. ° 9. Protect stored products from damage. r B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the. Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. B.. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: 1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named. a. Substitutions may be considered unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. Substitutions may be considered unless otherwise indicated. 3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" -- introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Substitutions may be considered unless otherwise indicated. 5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. — 7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article. 8. Basis -of -Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis -of -Design Productls" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Substitutions may be considered unless otherwise indicated. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 9 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches r Architects sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches f satisfactorily. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within ten (10) days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5 i Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 6 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner4nstalled products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -1 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. ._ 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: -- 1. Notify Owner not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. _ C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. ^ Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a -- detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 FCopyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of t each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. Insert special requirements for laying out the Work to suit Project. c: �+ 3.4 INSTALLATION ` " A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and rlo elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. l 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet2.4 m in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered Hazardous. 3.5 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. f 01700 - 3 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 1 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallabon Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend " preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress `- cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 4 7 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start new equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5 r tCopyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 r" SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 �. A. f s B. M 1.4 A. B. DEFINITIONS Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. QUALITY ASSURANCE Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire -protection systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems. 7. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. 8. Computer data systems. `, CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -1 r l Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. _ D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. -- Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2 r i Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 1' D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, *,. bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. t B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. k 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering r and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. r 3. Concrete, or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be • removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. See Divisions 15 and 16 for r additional information. i 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. t Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Where indicated to remain patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -3 rr Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 4 Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 r� I ` SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner or tenant occupancy. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before selective demolition. 4. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental -protection measures for selective demolition operations. 5. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 6. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 7. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. r i 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. r" 1.: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -1 I Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Proposed Dust -Control and Noise -Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. C. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. D. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by — selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI All 0.6 and NFPA 241. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. — C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as -- far as practical. 2. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Existing furniture and equipment. D. Hazardous Materials: The Owner has obtained an asbestos survey of the property and has found asbestos to be present in some areas. This survey will be made available to the Contractor upon — request. It is not expected that other hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials including asbestos will be removed by the Owner prior to performing any work indicated in those locations shown to contain asbestos. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2 t Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 a. Asbestos will be removed in 'coordination of the Project's two Phases. Removal of asbestos in areas to be renovated under Phase Number One will take place prior to issuing the initial Notice to Proceed. Removal of asbestos in areas to be renovated under Phase Number Two will take place prior to issuing a Notice to Proceed with the Work for Phase Number Two. r' 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered (other than those j known about in the asbestos survey), do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. r- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3 r• i Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations _ to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury -, to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. C. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental -protection regulations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 4 Copyright ri ht 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 C1. Wet mop floors to eliminatetrackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off -site. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 9. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 3. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. r- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5 r Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99_ 3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 1. Refer to Drawings for existing doors to be refinished. 2. Refer to Drawings for existing door frames to be reused. F. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain, using power -driven saw. Dislodge concrete from — reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. G. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power -driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts, except where indicated to be 'toothed - in' to maintain coursing. H. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. I. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. J. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. Refer to applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. K. Air -Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 6 Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 A. Refer to Drawings for Demolition Plan and related work describing full extent of demolition. B. Existing Items & Construction to Be Removed: Portions of existing partitions and ceilings, and all existing flooring, and wood paneling, and other items as indicated on the Drawings. C. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: All existing doors are to be removed, refinished and reinstalled. As indicated on the Drawings entire door and frame assemblies in specific cases are to be reinstalled at new locations. D. Existing Items to Remain: Refer to Drawings for extent of items to remain in place. END OF SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 7 1 ' Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Complete startup testing of systems. 8. Submit testladjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. l . CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -1 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." -- 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. _ 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for final acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection requirements have been completed. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 ! d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, r, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD l DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets, or three ring binders. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Projects Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable. D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable. E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. FCLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 r 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9/98 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 1 -inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," ^ Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 9198 F 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. j. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. k. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. I. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for MPE cleaning. M. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owners property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 FCLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/97 ii r SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe and tube handrails and railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering handrails and railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of handrail and railing materials based on the following: 1. Structural Steel: AISC S335, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design with Commentary." B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. C. Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following mabmum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1 A SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected handrails and railings. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. S. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work. 7 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -1 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5197 1. For installed handrails and railings indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating handrails and railings comply with ASTM E 985, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of handrail and railing through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 STORAGE A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well -ventilated, weathertight place. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Humane Equipment Co. b. Wagner: R & B Wagner, Inc. 2.2 METALS PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 2 i Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/97 A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows: a. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. b. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cast -in -Place and Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to sic times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Expansion anchors. 2.4 PAINT A. Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer formulated for priming zinc -coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. I~ PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 3 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/97 2.5 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT _ A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: By flush radius bends. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. E. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 5. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe or tube to which end is joined, and weld all around. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. H. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise _ impairing the Work. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 4 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/97 J. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. K. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1 /4 inch (6 mm) or less. M. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open -sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Galvanized Handrails and Railings: Hot -dip galvanize exterior steel and iron handrails and railings to comply with ASTM A 123. Hot -dip galvanize hardware for exterior steel and iron handrails and railings to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B_ For galvanized handrails and railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean handrails and railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic -phosphate process. D. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrail and railing components, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 114 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). C^ i - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 5 r Y Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/97 C. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post as follows: 1. Welded to post after placing anchoring material. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch (3-mm) build-up, sloped away from post. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the Ishop make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 6 7 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95 F 7 SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 3. Interior wood trim. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1: Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative -treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterbome-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3. For fire -retardant -treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener -holding capacities of treated materials. C. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire -retardant -treated wood products with performance requirements indicated. D. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. I A DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 -1 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. D. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent mabmum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a mabmum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 2 j Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95 1. Treatment Type: Interior Type A. 2. Treatment Type: Exterior. B. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items are not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board -size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species. 2.5 WOOD -BASED STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS A. Structural -Use Panel Standards: Provide either all -veneer, mat -formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood," where plywood is indicated. B. Trademark: Factory mark structural -use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. C. Miscellaneous Concealed Panels: APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1, span rating to suit framing in each location. D. Plywood Underlayment: Underlayment B-C Exterior with fully sanded face, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). E. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire -retardant -treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick. 2.6 PARTICLEBOARD A. General: Comply with and factory mark each panel according to ANSI A208.1. Provide thickness indicated. 2.7 FASTENERS r" A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. i MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 3 r- f Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95 1. Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. ._ B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock -forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. _ C. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. F. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. G. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Cut and shape to required size. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 4 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95 3.3 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1-by-34nch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-) size furring at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., vertically. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. END OF SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 5 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/98 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. �* 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. L 2. Wood cabinets. 3. Plastic -laminate countertops. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors." 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other itemsinstalled in architectural woodwork. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) [5 inches (125 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-1 I Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/98 2. Wood -veneer -faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm)12 by 24 inches (300 by 600 mm)], for each species and cut. Include at least one face -veneer seam and finish as specified. _ D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 r I Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/98 A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported �., and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sliced. C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed -grain hardwood. D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. E. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 22 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware ((Scheduled by Naming Products)." 1. See Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Comers of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 s Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/98 D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and — installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, — electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Custom. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood. 2.5 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame. D. Reveal Dimension: 3/4". — E. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Red oak, plain sliced. 1. Grain Matching: [Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. F. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: — 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid -hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for _ exposed surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood, same species indicated for exposed surfaces. 2.6 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AN Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. — B. Grade: Custom. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/98 C' C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: r 1. Countertop Laminate to be Wilsonart, #4630-60 Cloud Nebula. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. r F. Core Material: Particleboard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than [36 inches (900 mm)] [60 inches (11500 mm)] [96 inches (2400 mm)] long, except where shorter single -length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish y „ same as wood base, if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. ,..,, 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately r" aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. k . 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 964nch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. r G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/98 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.and to walls with adhesive. 3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Shelf standards and supports for adjustable wood shelves at cabinets. 1. K & V #255AL, standards, AL, flush mounted. 2. K & V #256AL, Natural, Support. B. Shelf standards and supports for adjustable wood shelves at wall shelving. 1. K & V #87 extra heavy duty standards, surface mounted. 2. K & V #187 extra heavy duty brackets. C. Hinges: European Type, self closing adjustable type hinge, Grass America, Inc., Snap-On 3000, Self Closing with 1.3 mm base plate. Concealed hinge for 3/4" reveal overlay doors, provide the number — of hinges required by the size and weight of the cabinet door. D. Pulls: Solid Wire Type, 4" long x 5/16" in diameter, US10B finish, Stanley #4484. E. Drawer Guides: K & V #1429 full extension slides. END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 FCopyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 SECTION 07552 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Single -ply, modified bituminous membrane roofing. 2. Base sheet. 3. Roofing insulation. 4. Fiber cant strips. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking, curbs, cants, and nailers. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definitions of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section. B. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop -applied roofing asphalt within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) measured at the mop cart immediately before application. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install a watertight, modified bituminous membrane roofing and base flashing system with compatible components that will not permit the passage of liquid water and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. FM Listing: Provide modified bituminous membrane, base flashings, and component materials that meet requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FM's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM markings. 1. Roofing system shall comply with the following: a. FireNVindstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 -1 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. Samples for Verification: Of the following products: 12-by-124nch (300-by-300-mm) square of modified bituminous, granule -surfaced cap sheets, of color specified. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system and is eligible to receive the standard roofing manufacturer's warranty. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that the roofing system complies with requirements specified in the "Performance Requirements" Article. Upon request, submit evidence of complying with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform Work of this Section who has specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project; who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product; and who is eligible to receive the standard roofing manufacturer's warranty. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL, FM, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; complying with ASTM E 108, for application and slopes indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well -ventilated, weathertight location to ensure no significant moisture pickup and maintain at a temperature exceeding roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double -stack rolls. 1. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to deck or structural supporting members. B. Do not leave unused felts and other sheet materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and moisture and unless maintained at a temperature exceeding 50 deg F (10 deg C). C. Deliver and store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected _ location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. D. Protect roofing insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 2 r ° Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS r A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty. The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, t . and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair leaks in the roof membrane and base flashings resulting from defects in materials or workmanship for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: 10 years. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Roofing systems shall be equal to TAMKO Asphalt Products modified bitumen specification #107FR, Awaplan Premium FR membrane. B. The following roofing systems are approved for the work of this section provided that all other conditions of this section 07552, including the system warranty and membrane warranty specified in other portions of this Specification, are met and warranties issued: 1. GAF system with Ruberoid MB Plus FR membrane. 2. Schuller system with DynaKap FR membrane. 2.2 SBS - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS A. All materials shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the roofing system installed. B. Provide roofing materials which comply with the following general standards or as recommended G by the roofing system manufacturer. C. Roofing System Materials: 1. Bitumen shall be airblown asphalt manufactured especially for roofi ng purposes with the current edition or lasted revision of ASTM Specification D 312, Steep Grade, Type III. 2. Modified Base Sheet shall be equal to TAMKO VERSA -BASE. .• 3. Fiberglass Base Ply and Stripping Ply shall be equal to TAMKO TAM -PLY IV. ' 4. Modified Bitumen Membrane shall be equal to TAMKO AWAPLAN PREMIUM FR granule surfaced modified bitumen membrane, color shall be white. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 3 r a. Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 5. Mop Applied Flashing Ply shall be equal to TAMKO AWAPLAN PREMIUM FR, granule surfaced modified bitumen membrane, color shall be white. D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Plastic Cement: a. Equal to TAMKO "TAM -PRO Plastic Roofing Cement", ASTM D-4586, FS SS-Cl 53, Type I. b. Equal to TAMKO"TAM-PRO Heavy. Bodied Flashing Cement", ASTM D-4586, FS SS- C153, Type I. C. Equal to TAMKO "TAM -PRO Wet or Dry Surface Plastic Roof Cement", ASTM D- -- 4586, ASTM D-3409. 2. Asphalt Primer, where required, shall comply with ASTM D41. 3. Fasteners, where required, shall be galvanized or non-ferrous type, size and design as required to suit application. 4. Preformed Cant shall be 4"x4" with a 45 degree angle and a 5" face. Cant material shall be — molded asphalt impregnated organic fiber or fire resistant perlite. E. Provide all additional materials required by the roofing system manufacturer to allow the inssuance of the Ten (10) Year NDL Roofing System Guarantee. 2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer shall conform to ASTM D-41. B. Bitumen shall be airblown asphalt manufactured especially for roofing purposes complying with the current edition or latest revision of ASTM specifications D-312, Steep Grade, Type 111, 185-205 degrees F. Softening point. C. Rigid Insulation and Insulative Fill: 1. General Requirements: a. Insulation types and manufacturers shall be accepted by roofing material manufacturer. b. Insulation shall be approved by Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories for use as a roofing insulation. 2. Polyisocyanurate - Foam Board Insulation. Rigid boards of minimum 2.0 pcf density, polyisocyanurate - base foam core. Provide faced boards 2.3 inches thick, with minimum "R" - value of 16.67 when tested according to ASTM C-518 after insulation is conditioned per RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure. Provide the manufacturer's standard sizes. 3. Equal to FIRESTONE "IS095+" or SCHULLER " UltraGard". D. Tapered Insulation: SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 4 FM I Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 7 1. Perlite Board Insulation: Rigid, noncombustible, perlite - fiber boards 3/4 inch thick, with minimum R-value of 2.08, integrally skinned surfaces, complying with ASTM C-728. Provide _ manufacturer's standard sizes. 2. Tapered insulation shall be equal to Tapered Fesco Board as manufactured by Schuller, International of Denver, Colorado. Panels shall be tapered 1/4" rise in 12" run as noted on the drawings. Minimum insulation thickness shall be % inch. E. Fasteners: 1. Fasteners shall be #14 Factory Mutal approved fastener with CRA 0 coating with a minimum .188" diameter shank and a .245" diameter thread with round pressure plate. Fastener selection, spacing and installation shall resist wind uplift force of 90 pounds per square foot of deck in accordance with UL 1897. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced. C. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at roof penetrations and terminations and match the thicknesses of insulation required. 1. Verify that wood nailer strips are located perpendicular to roof slope and are spaced according to requirements of roofing system manufacturer. D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install modified bituminous membrane roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of NRCA/ARMA's "Quality Control Recommendations for Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." 1. Install roofing system according to applicable specification plates of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual B. Start installation of modified bituminous membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel C. Shingling Plies: Install modified bituminous membrane roofing system with ply sheets shingled uniformly to achieve required number of membrane plies throughout. Shingle in direction to shed water. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 5 r Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 D. Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree cant strips at junctures of modified bituminous membrane roofing system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees. M E. Cooperate with inspecting and testing agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing modified bituminous membrane roofing system. F. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide cutoffs at end of each days work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashing and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. G. Asphalt Heating: Heat roofing asphalt and apply within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature, unless otherwise required by roofing system manufacturer. Do not raise roofing asphalt temperature above the equiviscous temperature range more than one hour before time of application. Do not exceed roofing asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits during roofing asphalt heating. Do not heat roofing asphalt within 25 deg F (14 deg C) of flash point. Discard roofing asphalt maintained at a temperature exceeding 500 deg F (260 deg C) for more than 4 hours. Keep kettle lid closed, unless adding roofing asphalt. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. if mopping is applied directly to substrate, tape substrate joints. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION/GENERAL A. All roof insulation work shall be done in strict accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before preceding with the work. B. Do not overload the building structure with the storage of materials or use of equipment of the deck. C. Do not proceed with the installation of insulation unless the materials, equipment and tradesmen required for the installation of the roofing insulation and membrane over the insulation are on the project site and ready to follow with this work immediately (same day) behind the work. Do not install any more insulation each day than can be covered with waterproof membrane by the end of that working day. D. Prepare the substrate so that it is dry, clean, relatively smooth and otherwise satisfactorily prepared to receive the roof insulation board. E. Extend insulation full thickness over the entire surfaces to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. F. Form slight depressions at roof scuppers and roof drains with insulation approximately 1" less in thickness than adjacent roof areas so that finished roofing will not be above adjoining areas. G. All insulation application shall resist wind uplift force of 90 pounds per square foot of deck area in accordance with UL 1897. H. The contractor is cautioned than any insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed, SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 6 F Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC qM discarded and replaced. 3.5 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secured C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, and cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place. 3.6 INSULATION APPLICATION A. Mechanically fasten one layer of insulation to the metal roof deck in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. Mop second layer of insulation with joints staggered from first layer. B. Embed one layer of tapered insulation or insulative fill in a mopping of hot asphalt applied at an appro)amate rate of 33 pounds per 100 square feet of deck area. C. Lay insulation board with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. D. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with base ply membrane in the same day. E. Mopping asphalt shall be heated to between 375 degrees and 425 degrees F. at the point of application (mop bucket, mechanical mopper or felt layer). Asphalt shall not be heated above 525 degrees F. nor held above 500 degrees F. for more than 4 hours. F. Each board of insulation shall be walked into place and shall be physically checked by workmen for proper adhesion. G. Cut and fit insulation boards where deck intersects vertical surfaces. Cut board 1/4 inch from vertical surface. H. Promptly spread and bitumen pools that may accumulate on insulation surface to achieve smooth surface for roofing installation. I. The long dimension of the insulation boards shall generally run perpendicular to the roof slope and the short joints shall be staggered. J. The insulation shall be butted together with no gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Gaps greater than 114 inch shall be filled with the same material. Ma)amum elevation variation between insulation boards at joints shall be 1/8 inch. 3.7 CRICKETS A. Install premanufactured crickets as shown on drawings. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 7 r Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 B. Adhere crickets to substrate in a full mopping of hot steep asphalt. C. Cricket material shall have a'/ inch per 12 inch slope. 3.8 TEMPORARY WATER CUTOFFS A. The contractor shall install temporary water cutoffs at the end of each days work. B. The water cutoff shall consist of 1 ply of modified base ply installed in a mopping of hot asphalt extending onto the deck and insulation a minimum of 6 inches. C. When roofing work is to be resumed, the temporary water cutoff shall be removed cleanly from the insulation (top surface and vertical joint) and from the deck to ensure tight insulation joints and level — insulation surfaces. D. Any in -place roofing which becomes wet from the contractor's failure to install temporary water cutoffs or a faulty temporary water cutoff installation shall be removed and replaced by the '— contractor as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the owner. 3.9 CLEANING A. At completion of work under this section, all rubbish accumulated by these operations shall be removed from the site. 3.10 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. All modified bitumen roofing materials and construction shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. If printed instructions are not obtainable or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. 3.11 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Before ply application is started, prepare surface by removing trash, debris, grease, oil, water moisture and contaminates affecting bond of asphalt to surface. B. Vertfy that surfaces are dryas per respective manufacturer's and applicator's published instructions. C. Prepare other surfaces according to respective manufacturer's and applicator's published instructions. D. Use cleaning materials necessary to render an acceptable surface. E. User compatible materials on voids and joints so finished deck surface will be even and smooth. F. Protect adjacent areas with tarpaulin or other durable materials. G. Prepare properly for flashing and secure in position any projections through roof deck. Install new metal flashing, fascias, gravel guards and other items as required. H. Inspect all parapet walls, roof edges, etc. prior to application of roofing to make sure that proper provisions have been made to install metal counterflashings, etc.. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 8 r t Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 Do not apply roofing if damp weather is imminent or if any other conditions exist that will not permit proper application. Do not apply roofing when moisture is present in the deck. 3.12 WORKMANSHIP A. Protect any lifting point on the roof or deck where roofing materials are transferred from one container to another with two sheets of 4'x8'x5/8" plywood laid with long edges together covered with base sheet overlapping all sides four feet and up and over the parapet. B. Repair any damaged areas of base sheet by applying a patch with mopping of hot asphalt overlapping the damaged area 12" on each side. C. Furnish a thermometer for checking temperature of asphalt in the kettle and at the point of application to the roof deck. D. Asphalt heating: 1. ASTM D 312 Type III Steep Asphalt shall not be heated above 525 degrees F. nor held above 500 degrees F. for more than 4 hours and shall be applied at temperatures between 375 degrees F. and 425 degrees F. unless specifically instructed otherwise by the roofing system manufacturer. E. Provide temporary water cutoffs at the end of each work day. Remove temporary water cutoffs cleanly when work is resumed. 3.13 MEMBRANE ROOF INSTALLATION A. Starting at the low point of the roof, embed one ply of base sheet with a minimum of 2" side laps and a minimum of 4" end laps into a full mopping of hot steep asphalt at a minimum rate of 23 pounds per 100 square feet. Broom to obtain embedment of the base ply. B. Starting at the low point of the roof, solidly adhere one ply of equal to TAMKO AWAPLAN PREMIUM FR membrane by mop applying with minimum 4" side laps and minimum 6" end laps. The AWAPLAN membrane shall be solidly adhered to the ply sheet (pressed into the hot asphalt) at a rate of approximately 23 lbs. (+/- 15%) per 100 square feet. All laps shall be checked and sealed while the modified bitumen is still in a semi -fluid state from roll application. A minimum of 1/4" flow of asphalt must extend beyond all edges. Care shall be taken to avoid excessive amounts of asphalt at the lap. All exposed asphalt in excess of 1/4" width shall be covered with granules while the asphalt is still hot. Asphalt temperature shall not be less than 400 degrees F. at point of application. Do not mop more that 4 feet in front of roll. Remove factory splices of modified asphalt sheet materials prior to installation or cover factory splices in the field with a 12" width of modified asphalt sheet material set in hot asphalt. C. Apply membrane without wrinkles or tears, free from air pockets. D. Extend membrane up cant strips and a minimum of 2 inches onto vertical surface. E. At the end of each day install temporary water cutoffs consisting one ply of coated base sheet installed In mopping of asphalt extending onto the deck a minimum of 6". Cover all edges of insulation. Completely remove water cutoffs before resuming roofing. F. Seal membrane around roof penetrations. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 9 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 3.14 FLASHING A. All new base and parapet flashing shall be torch applied material and systems B. Apply membrane base flashing to seal membrane to vertical elements. Extend a minimum of 6" onto field of roof surface and a minimum of 8" up vertical surface being flashed. Secure top edge at 8" on center. ._ C. Apply modified bitumen parapet flashing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written requirements and recommendations. D. Termination bars shall be bedded in sealant and shall be anchored 6" on center and within 1" of the end of each bar. Abutting bars shall be spaced 1/4" apart. A continuous bead of sealant shall be placed along the top of all termination bars. E. See Section 07600 for miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items to be installed in the work. F. Provide all accessories and materials to provide a complete and watertight installation of the expansion joint cover. 3.15 TERMINATION BARS A. Termination bars shall be fastened at a minimum spacing of 6" on center with a fastener 1" from each end. B. Joints between runs of termination bars shall be 1/4 to inches wide. C. Termination bars shall have a continuous bead of sealant applied at the top of the bar which completely seals the bar and the edges of the flashing membrane. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 3.17 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect modified bituminous membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing _ for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove modified bituminous roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair base flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07552 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 -10 FCopyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/94 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae. 2. Metal flashing. 3. Reglets. 4. Roof expansion -joint covers. 5. Overhead -piping safety pans. S. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I^" 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. 2. Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane as part of roofing -system work. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ! A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, ` thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. S. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention 1 Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone: 1. Wind Zone 1: Wind pressures of 10 to 20 psf (0.48 to 0.96 kPa). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. ISHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -1 Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/94 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. — PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock -forming quality, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 REGLETS A. General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated. B. Surface -Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. C. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. D. Counterflashing Wind -Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. E. Available Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fry Reglet Corporation. 2. Hickman: W.P. Hickman Co. 3. Keystone Flashing Company. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux. B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 i Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/94 d 1 E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather -resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. G. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq. m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style 1 b. H. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick black polyethylene film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154. I. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type 1, asbestos free, asphalt based. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/94 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Roof -Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. (1.6 mm thick), hard tempered. C. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. D. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. E. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. F. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. G. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. H. Eave Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: _ 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. I. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. J. Roof Expansion -Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick. 2. Bellows: Neoprene 3. Equal to: Expand-O-Flash Style CF-EJ as detailed. 2.6 ALUMINUM EXTRUSION FABRICATIONS A. Aluminum Extrusion Units. Fabricate extruded -aluminum running units with formed or extruded -aluminum joint covers for installation behind main members where possible. Fabricate -- mitered and welded corner units. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 i k Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/94 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Roof -Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. Pretinning is not required for the following metals: a. Lead. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. t 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. t SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 I l Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/94 H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red -rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. Install reglets to receive counterflashing according to the following requirements: 1. Where reglets are shown in substrate indicated. J. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap -in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and bed with sealant. K. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION — A. Clean, exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 6 7 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and windows. b. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. C. Other joints as indicated. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 64nch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. r- JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -1 r- Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified _ 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint -sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated ro by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint -Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint -Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint -Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed -cell material with a surface skin. C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tuning complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbentto water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical _ abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. -- Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing C protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. i t: 3.4 CLEANING I•" I' JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 r Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Single -Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant ES-1: Where joint sealant of this type is indicated, provide product complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide the following: -- a. DYMONIC, Tremco Sealant Systems 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class:12-1/2. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: B. Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant ES-2: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic file joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. C. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. _ e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. _ a. Use O Joint Substrates: 3.7 LATEX JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 A. Latex Sealant LS-1: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. b. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. C. Tremflex 834; Tremco. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC m7 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel door frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" for door hardware and weather stripping. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot -grouting frames installed in steel -framed gypsum board partitions. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory -primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic -coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire -resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1 r Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Frames: a. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. b. Kewanee Corporation (The). C. Pioneer Industries Inc. d. Republic Builders Products. e. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Electrolytic Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet for: 1. Door openings wider than 48 inches (1220 mm). 2. Wood doors. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 CCopyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2199 C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single -door frames and two silencers on heads of double -door frames. D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc -coated or metallic -coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.1774nch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc -coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly Identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. G. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers and seamless face joints. H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at Project site. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. 2.5 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied coat of rust -inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. r STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 3. In metal -stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 4 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer faces. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for requirements for veneers from the same flitches for both flush wood doors and architectural woodwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and louvers. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Individually package doors in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -1 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11 /96 B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or concealed marldngs. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the referenced quality standard for Project's geographical location. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span, or do not comply with tolerances in referenced quality standard. 1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flush Wood Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Buell Door Co. C. Weyerhaeuser Co. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Grade: Premium (Grade A faces). 2. Faces: Red oak, plain sliced. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Match within Door Faces: Center balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for pairs of doors and for doors hung in adjacent sets. 6. Stiles: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges of faces. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 i 2.3 SOLID -CORE DOORS �., A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking at particleboard -core doors as follows: a. 5-inch (125-mm) top -rail blocking, at doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom -rail blocking, at exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. C. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices. B. Interior Veneer -Faced Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Core: Particleboard core. 2. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI All 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. r 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 7 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 C. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section 'Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. — B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without — damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 FCopyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2198 SECTION 08711 -DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. r" 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part of a fire -rated labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. p DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 -1 L Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other _ work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSi A117.1, FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards," as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2) Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. 3) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Thresholds: Not more than 112 inch (13 mm) high Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) high for exterior sliding doors. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Delayed -Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 - 2 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 C. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width. ,. d. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 7 r 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule , and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. e i DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 3 i Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BQ. 3. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 4. Hager Companies (HAG). 5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). _ 6. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). 7. Mont -Hard Corporation; Div. of Fanal, SA (MH). _ 8. PBB, Inc. (PBB). 9. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). -� 10. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units.. C. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded -to -the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors. r 4. Screws: Phillips flat -head screws. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Accurate Lock and Hardware Co. (ALH). b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). C. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH). d. Arrow Architectural Hardware; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (AAH). e. Best Lock Corporation (BLC). f. Brink: R. R. Brink Locking Systems, Inc. (RRB). g. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). h. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). i. Door Controls International (DCI). _ J. Folger Adam Security Inc. (FAS). k. Glynn -Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). I. Hager Companies (HAG). M. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). — n. Lockwood Architectural Hardware; Div. of Lloyd Matheson Inc. (LAH). o. Marks USA (MKS). p. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). q. Medeco High Security Locks, Inc. (MED). r. NT Falcon Lock Co.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTF). S. PDQ Manufacturing Co. (PDQ). t. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). U. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). V. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 - 4 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 r , W. Security Door Controls (SDC). X. Simplex; Div. of UNICAN (SIM). ,. y. Southern Steel Co.; Div. of Phelps-Tointon Inc. (SS). Z. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). aa. Weiser Lock; Div. of Masco Building Products Corporation (WEI). bb. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/24nch (12.7-mm) latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm) bolt throw. C. Rabbeted Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 DOOR BOLTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Surface Bolts: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). b. Door Controls International (DCI). C. Glynn -Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). d. Hager Companies (HAG). e. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). f. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). h. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). 2. Flush Bolts: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). C. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). d. Door Controls International (DCI). e. Glynn -Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). f. Hager Companies (HAG). g. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). h. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). I. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). j. Rlxson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Securely Inc. (RIX). k. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). I. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). M. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING I A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 5 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC NM 1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. Retain subparagraph above or subparagraph and list of manufacturers below. Above significantly reduces competition and may result in higher costs. a. ABLOY High Security Locks; Div. of ASSA ABLOY, Inc. (ABL). b. Arrow Architectural Hardware; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (AAH). C. ASSA High Security Locks; Div. of ASSA ABLOY, Inc. (ASA). d. Best Lock Corporation (BLC). e. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). f. Lockwood Architectural Hardware; Div. of Lloyd Matheson Inc. (LAH). g. Marks USA (MKS). h. Medeco High Security Locks, Inc. (MED). i. NT Falcon Lock Co.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTF). j. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). k. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). I. Weiser Lock; a Masco Building Products Corporation (WEI). M. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). 2. Key Control Systems: a. Key Control Systems, Inc. (KCS). b. Major Metalfab Co. (MM). C. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). d. Sunroc Corporation (SUN) B. Keys: Provide nickel -silver keys complying with the following: 1. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. C. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great -Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.6 CLOSERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Arrow Architectural Hardware; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (AAH). 2. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 3. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 4. DORMA Door Controls Inc.; Member of The DORMA Group (DC). 5. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 6. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC). 7. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 8. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 9. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). 2.7 STOPS AND HOLDERS DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 - 6 r Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH). 2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 4. Door Controls International (DCI). 5. DORMA Door Controls Inc.; Member of The DORMA Group (DC). 6. Glynn -Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 7. Hager Companies (HAG). 8. 9. Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. (HES). Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 10. Ives: H. B. Ives (NS). 11. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 12. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC). 13. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTD). r 14. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). 15. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). r i 16. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 17. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 18. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). r- 19. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). B. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. C. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 112 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled4n application to frame. 2.8 DOOR GASKETING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Door Gasketing: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). e. Sealeze Corporation (SEL). f. Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg-Duncan Company (ULT). g. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 2. Door Bottoms: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). e. Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg-Duncan Company (ULT). f. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 7 DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 7 r E Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. D. Smoke -Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke -control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. Provide smoke -labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke -labeled doors. E. Fire -Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252. F. Sound -Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. H. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701 [702. 2.9 THRESHOLDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hager Companies (HAG). -- 2. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 3. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTD). 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). 5. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 6. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 7. Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg-Duncan Company (ULT). 8. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 2.10 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and SHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 - 8 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2198 w recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire -rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire -rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. C. Surface -mounted exit devices. 4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.11 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 - 9 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI All 15 series. 1. Surface -Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. _ 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space =' fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from — an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 -10 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial CompletioN. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. HW4: DOORS MARKED 2 EACH TO HAVE: 1. 3 Hinges - TA2714 4'/Z x 4 1/2613 McKinney 0 2. 1 Lockset - 931671315C-S3 613 Best 3. 1 Stop - 409 613 Rockwood 4. 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco B. HW-2: DOORS MARKED 3, 4 EACH TO HAVE: 1. 3 Hinges - TA2714 4'/z x 4'/2 613 McKinney 2. 1 Lockset - 93K7AB15C-S3 613 Best rV 3. 1 Stop - 409 613 Rockwood 4. 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco C. HW-3: DOORS MARKED 5 EACH TO HAVE: 1. 6 Hinges - TA2714 4'/ x 4'/2 613 McKinney 2. 2 Flush Bolts - 557 613 Rockwood �io 3. 1 Dust Proof Stk - 570 613 Rockwood 4. 1 Lockset - 931<71315C-S3 613 Best 5. 1 Stop - 409 613 Rockwood 6. 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco D. HW-4: DOORS MARKED 6, 7 EACH TO HAVE: 1. 3 Hinges - TA2714 4 1/2x 4 % 613 McKinney 2. 1 Push - 70C 613 Rockwood 3. 1 Pull -122 x 70C 613 Rockwood �s 4. 1 Closer - EB1431 x TB Sargent 5. 1 Kickplate -10" x 2" TB Rockwood 6. 1 Stop - 409 613 Rockwood 7. 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco E. HW-5: DOORS MARKED 8 EACH TO HAVE: 1. 1 Threshold -170 Bronze Pemko 2. 1 Door Bottom - 315BN Bronze Pemko 3. 1 Weatherstripping - 305BR Bronze Pemko F. HW-6: DOORS MARKED 9,11 EACH TO HAVE: 1-0 DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 -11 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 1. 3 Hinges - TA2714 4'/ x 4'/ 613 McKinney 2. 1 Lockset - 93K7AB15C-S3 613 Best 3. 1 Closer - EB1431 x TB Sargent 4. 1 Kickplate -10" x 2" LDS 613 Rockwood 5. 1 Stop - 409 613 Rockwood 6. 1 Gasket - S88D Pemko G. HW-7: DOORS MARKED 10 EACH TO HAVE: 1. 6 Hinges - TA2714 4'/ x 4'/ 613 McKinney 2. 2 Flush Bolts - 557 613 Rockwood 3. 4. 1 Dust Proof Stk - 570 613 Rockwood 1 Lockset - 93K7D15C-S3 613 Best 5. 2 Closers EB1431 x TB Sargent 6. 2 Stop - 409 613 Rockwood 7. 1 Gasket - S88D Pemko H. HW-8: EXISTING DOOR TO LAN ROOM TO HAVE: 1. 1 Dead Bolt 83T 7L 613 Best X�o - I. HW-9: RECEPTION GATE TO HAVE: r 1. 1 Cab Lock - 444S Locknetics 2. 1 Remote Release - 701RD Locknetics 3. 1 Transformer - 591-24 Locknetics END OF SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 08711 -12 Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 2199 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Non -load -bearing steel framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Textured Finishes: Provide one 24"x24" sample board for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -1 Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Dietrich Industries, Inc. -- b. National Gypsum Company. C. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. G-P Gypsum Corp. b. National Gypsum Company. C. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)at typical partitions, 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) at head runner, sill runner, jamb & cripple studs at door and other openings.. 2. Depth: As indicated. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated., B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Type X: a. Thickness: 518 inch (15.9 mm). b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 2 FCopyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. L-Bead: (With face flange only.) Face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. C. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use one-peice control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. r► B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SCA 70 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. C. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Imo'" GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 3 I Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: — 1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock -- wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Aggregate Finish: _ a. G-P Gypsum Corp.; GyProc Vermiculite Ceiling Texture. B. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. C. Aggregate Finish: Water -based, job -mixed, aggregated, drying -type texture finish for spray application. 1. Texture: Spatter knock -down. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 4 POW i - Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 c A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing .� installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt -felt, or foam -gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. I B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. E. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. t F. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. r 3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL C' A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. i. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1 /16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 5 Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. Y H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm) wide joints to install sealant. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. 3.5 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single -Layer Application: On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing)], unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 6 r Copyright 1999 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/99 B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. 2. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where indicated. 3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 7 r r ! i Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 1, F. 7 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 124nch- (300-mm-) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire -response tests were performed by UL, ITSMarnock Hersey, or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services. 2. Surface -burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -1 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Existing Conditions: Some existing ceilings are indicated on the Drawings to remain and/or be modified to work with new partitions. Where existing ceilings are Indicated to be removed, salvage acoustical panels and relocate to replace other existing panels as necessary. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated for each designation in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 Copyright ri ht 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 7 A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and r.. light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-314 Inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. C. Panel Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM E 1264 classifications. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3. C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High -Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high -humidity finishes are indicated. D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 6411A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-4nch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. �.» F. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile Indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems Indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 i� i... Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel .� ceilings. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose Installation is specified in other Sections. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at -' opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 3. U.B.C.'s "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings": U.B.C. Standard 25-2. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or drilled -in anchors that extend — through forms into concrete. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. — 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 Copyright ri ht 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of i minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE A. Water -Felted, Mineral -Base Acoustical Panels with Membrane -Faced Overlay for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type W: Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. USG; Eclipse, ClimaPlus #76775;Class A. b. Armstrong: Equal to USG above; Class A. 2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted 3. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern as specified by product designation. 4. Color: White. 5. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 1 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.50 - 0.60. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class: [Not less than CAC 40. 8. Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members. 9. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 10. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). B. Water -Felted, Mineral -Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling, Type "B": Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels, treated with antimicrobial solution, and complying with the following: following: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 r Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11 /96 1. Products: Available products include the following: a.USG; Auratone Omni; Product #345; Class A b.Armstrong; Cortega Product #769; Class A 2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: a. Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water -felted. 3. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation, as specified by product designation. 4. Color: White. 5. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 1. 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.50 - NRC 0.60. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 40. 8. Edge Detail: Square. 9. Thickness: 5/8 inch () 10. Size: 24 by 24 inches ( (610 by 1220 mm)). C. High -Density Ceramic -Base Acoustical Panels with Scrubbable Finish for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type "C": Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels, treated with antimicrobial solution, and complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. USG; Omni ClimaPlus; Product #990; Class A. b. Armstrong; Fine Fissured RH90; Product #1729; Class A. 2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type XX, other types; described as high - density, ceramic --base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes. 3. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation CD perforated, small holes and fissured. 4. Color: White. 5. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.80. 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.60. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 40. 8. Edge Detail: Square. 9. Thickness: 5/8 inch ((16 mm)). 10. Size: 24 by 24 inches ((610 by 610 mm)). 0 D. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceilings Type "A" & "B": Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panel ceiling suspension system complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. USG; Donn Suspension Systems; #DX24. b. Armstrong; Prelude 7300 Series. 2. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -lip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G01 ( (Z001)) coating designation, with ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 FCopyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11 /96 prefinished 15/16-inch- ( (24-mm-)) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: a. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. r b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type, as standard with manufacturer. C. Face Design: Flush face. d. Cap Material: Steel sheet. e. Cap Finish: Painted White. E. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type "C": Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panel ceiling suspension system complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. USG; Donn Suspension Systems; #DXLA b. Armstrong; Prelude 7300 Series. 2. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G01 ( (Z001)) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- ( (24-mm-)) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: e a. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type, as standard with manufacturer. C. Face Design: Flush face. d. Cap Material: Aluminum sheet. e. Cap Finish: Painted White. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 7 FCopyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96 r SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. For resilient accessories, manufacturer's standard -size samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient accessory color and pattern specified. C. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor tile to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project Identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -1 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96 D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective r covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, class, wearing surface, and size of resilient file flooring installed. 2. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient accessory installed. 3. Deliver extra materials to Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESILIENT TILE A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066 and with requirements specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule. 2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 2 r i 6 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96 A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I and with requirements specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule. 2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Examine condition of existing subfloor to insure that manufacturer's requirements are met. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Use stair -tread -nose filler, according to resilient tread manufacturer's written instructions, to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 3 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96 E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with file manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half of a file at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting files from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, _ cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in basket -weave pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles. D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining .- marking device. G. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with the manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install resilient accessories according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 4 f Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96 4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 5. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with G adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop floor to remove marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. 1. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SCHEDULE A. Vinyl Composition Tile VCT: Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl composition floor tile complying with the following: 1. Available Products: As follows: a. Tarkett, Expressions #2010 White China Blue Stone € 2. Color and Pattern: A specified by product designation indicated above. € 3. Class: Class 2 (through -pattern tile). 4. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 5. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 6. Size: 12 by 12 inches (304.8 by 304.8 mm). FRESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 5 Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96 B. Rubber Wall Base: Where this designation is indicated, provide rubber wall base complying with the following: 1. Available Products: As follows: a. Roppe, #50 Gray 2. Color and Pattern: As specified by product designation indicated above. 3. Style: Cove with top -set toe. 4. Minimum Thickness: [1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 5. Height: 4 inches (101.6 mm). 6. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (29.26 m). 7. Outside Corners: Job formed. 8. Inside Corners: Job formed. 9. Surface: Smooth. END OF SECTION 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 6 i Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Tufted carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 9 Sections "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" and "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include In maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." CARPET 09680 -1 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/98 B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. _ Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years on carpet and 2 years on labor from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full -width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Lees Commercial Carpet, Faculty IV a. Color: #4017 Lagoon Blue B. Fiber Content: Antron Legacy BCF. C. Fiber Type: Nylon D. Face Construction: Multilevel -loop pile. E. Gauge: 1/8 inch (mm). F. Stitches: 8.3 inch (mm). CARPET 09680 - 2 Copyright 1998 AIA MASTERSPEC G. Pile Height:.187 inches (mm) average for finished carpet per ASTM D 418. H. Surface Pile Weight: 26 ozJsq. yd. (glsq. m). 1. Total Weight: 77.1 ozJsq. yd. (glsq. m) for finished carpet. J. Primary Backing: Woven polypropylene K. Secondary Backing: Woven polypropylene L. Width: 12 feet (m) M. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Permanent Static Protection. Dissipates static electricity and prevents static build-up in excess of 3.OKV at 70degrees F., 20% RH when tested under AATCC-134-75. 2. Flammability: Pass DOC-FF-1-70 Pill Test. Pass Floor Radiant Panel, NFPA- Class 1 when tested under ASTM E-648. Pass NBS Smoke Chamber NFPA-258 (450 or less) Flaming mode. 3. Warranty: Edge Ravel - No edge ravel, normal use, for lifetime of carpet. Secondary Back Adhesion - No delamination, normal use, for lifetime of carpet. Tuft Bind - 20 poundaverage tuft bind (loop pile) normal use, for lifetime of carpet. END OF SECTION 09680 CARPET 09660 - 3 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL t. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. L: r" 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron worts, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components: a. Metal toilet enclosures. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Light fixtures. d. Distribution cabinets. L 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: L a. Furred areas. b. Pipe spaces. C. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Bronze and brass. r■ 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: 7, PAINTING 09900 -1 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board. 3. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. _ 3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. -- 5. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual _ conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Refer to color schedule at the end of this section. 2. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 3. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. PAINTING 09900 2 7 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. include lists of completed projects with project r names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information I specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are a enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. FPAINTING 09900 - 3 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Fuller -O'Brien Paints (Fuller). 3. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden). 4. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 5. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 6. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & Q. 7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and _ application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. PAINTING 09900 - 4 r Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 1f removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. FPAINTING 09900 - 5 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3.Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and -- techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions — detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, — convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed "— surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through — registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. PAINTING 09900 - 6 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and -coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed PAINTING 09900 -7 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats. K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective -- wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust -inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 2) Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3) Glidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. 4) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint #163. 5) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. PAINTING 09900 - 8 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 6) P & L: S/D 1009 Suprime "9" Interior/Exterior Alkyd Metal Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic -latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 17XX Wonder -Shield Semi -Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 2) Fuller: 664-XX Weather King II Semi -Gloss House & Trim Paint. 3) Glidden: 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint. 4) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096. 5) PPG: 78 Line Sun -Proof Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 6) P & L: Z/F 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House & Trim Finish. B. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 8502/8520 Mirrolac-WB Interior/Exterior Waterborne Flat DTM Primer and Finish. 2) Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer. 3) Glidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. Ir .. 4) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer 0155. 5) PPG: 90-709 Pitt Tech One Pack Interior/Extedor Primer/Finish DTM Industrial �` Enamel. 4 6) P & L: Z/F 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex Metal Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic -latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 17XX Wonder -Shield Semi -Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 2) Fuller: 664-XX Weather King II Semi -Gloss House & Trim Paint. 3) Glidden: 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint. 4) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096. 5) PPG: 78 Line Sun -Proof Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 6) P & L: Z/F 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House & Trim Finish. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Existing Concrete and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following paint systems over existing interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over existing paint finish. a. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar 200. r. t I PAINTING 09900 - 9 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 2) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Oder Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi -Gloss Oil. B. Existing Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over existing interior concrete masonry block units: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over existing paint finish. a. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar 200. 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: (Omit Primer at existing paint finish gypsum board.) 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. (Omit at existing paint finish gypsum board.) a. Primer: Latex -based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer. 2) PPG: 17-10 Quick -Drying Interior Latex Primer -Sealer. b. First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic -latex -based, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm). 1) S-W: EverClean Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 2) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint. D. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, interior wood surfaces: (Omit undercoat at existing paint finishes.) 1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic -latex -based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) S-W: ProMar Classic Latex Primer 2) PPG: 6-755 Speedhide Interior Water -Based Undercoater. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) S-W: EverClean Interior Latex Semi -Gloss. 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. E. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd -Based, Satin -Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd -based, clear -satin varnish over a sealer coat and an alkyd -based, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. PAINTING 09900 - 10 F Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8195 a. Filler Coat: Paste -wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG: None required. 2) S-W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. b. Stain Coat: Alkyd -based, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG: 77-302 Rez Interior Semi -Transparent Stain. 2) S-W: Oil Stain A48 Series. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick -Drying Sealer and Finish. 2) S-W: ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. d. First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd -based or polyurethane varnish, as recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear. 2) S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. F. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer. a. Primer: Quick -drying, rust -inhibitive, alkyd -based or epoxy -metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1) S-W: B50Z Series Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer 2) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) S-W: B66-200 (Semi -Gloss) DTM Acrylic Coating 2) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoater. C. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) S-W: B66-200 (Semi -Gloss) DTM Acrylic Coating 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. G. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc -coated metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. 7 PAINTING 09900 -11 1 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95 a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) S-W: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish 2) PPG: 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack InteriortExterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel. r b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) S-W: A-100 Exterior Latex Satin. 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Walt & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. 3.8 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE A. Exterior fascia and trim colors to match existing. B. Interior colors as follows: 1. Walls & surfaces not scheduled: Equal to Sherwin Williams color "Pure White" #SW1004. 2. Chair Rail: Equal to Sherwin Williams color "Rhinestone" #SW1235. 3. Door Frames: Equal to Sherwin Williams color "Evening Shade" #1234. 4. Millwork Stain: Submit samples. END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 -12 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5195 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data inr each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame -resistance characteristics. C. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. Wall Covering Material: Fuli-width sample, not less than 36 inches (914 mm) long, from dye lot used for the Work. D. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings. E. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. F. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface -burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. WALL COVERINGS 09950 -1 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed _ and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambienttemperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each wall covering Product Data sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. General: Mildew -resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood -veneer wall covering and substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. _ 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust -inhibitive Anc primer. 3. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 2 r I Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95 4. Prime newgypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not f" less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. l B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and corners only. C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. D. Match pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finish floor. E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) from inside corners. No horizontal seams. F. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. G. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. 3A CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use clearing methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 3.5 VINYL WALL COVERING PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Vinyl Wall Covering Standard: FS CCC-W-408A and CFFA-W-101-A, Type 11, Medium Duty. B. Wall Covering Durability Standard: ASTM F 793 for Category V, Type 11 Commercial Serviceability. C. Total Weight: 21 OZJSQ. YD. Total weight does not include performance coatings. D. Width: 53J54INCHES E. Backing Material: Osnaburg. F. Stain -Resistant Coating: KoroKlear G. Available Products: Cumulus II, Astral #6621-60 by Koroseal Wallcovering, RJF International Corp. P• s WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 3 l Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC END OF SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS 5/95 09950 - 4 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC r 4 , SECTION 10100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 11195 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Porcelain enamel markerboards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board indicated. Include motor capacities and individual panel weights for sliding chalkboard and markerboard units. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of visual display board required. 1. Include dimensioned elevations. Show location of joints between individual panels where unit dimensions exceed maximum panel length. 2. Include sections of typical trim members. 3. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. C. Samples for Verification: Of the following products, showing color and texture or finish selected. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Chalkboards and Markerboards: Actual sections of porcelain enamel finish for each type of chalkboard and markerboard required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display boards through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display boards and are based on the products indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architects approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS FVISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 -1 l: Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements before preparation of Shop Drawings and before fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special porcelain enamel chalkboard warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Porcelain Enamel Chalkboard Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace porcelain enamel chalkboards that do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking within the specified warranty period, provided the manufacturer's written instructions for handling, installation, protection, and maintenance have been followed. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: a. Best -Rite Chalkboard Co. b. Carolina Chalkboard Co. C. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. d. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. _ e. Greensteel, Inc. f. Lemco, Inc. g. Marsh Chalkboard Company. h. Nelson Adams Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards and Markerboards: Balanced, high -pressure -laminated, porcelain enamel chalkboards of 3-ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing. 1. Face Sheet: 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) enameling grade steel especially processed for temperatures used in coating porcelain on steel. Coat exposed face and edges with a 3-coat process consisting of primer, ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with a 2-coat process consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F (649 deg C). VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 2 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 4 a. Cover Coat: Provide manufacturer's standard, light-colored, special writing surface with gloss finish intended for use with erasable dry markers. 2. Core: 3/84nch- (9.5-mm-) thick, particleboard core material complying with requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1. 3. Backing Sheet: 0.0154nch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum -sheet backing. 4. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture -resistant, thermoplastic -type adhesive. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.0624nch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded -aluminum alloy, size and shape as indicated, to suit type of installation. Provide straight, single -length units. Keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure. 1. Feld -Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard snap -on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints. 2. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, box -type, aluminum chalktray with slanted front and cast -aluminum end closures for each chalkboard. 3. Map Rail: Furnish map rail at top of each unit, complete with the following accessories: a. Display Rail: Provide continuous cork display rail approximately 1 or 2 inches (25 or 50 mm) wide, as indicated, integral with map rail. b. End Stops: Provide one end stop at each end of map rail. C. Map Hooks: Provide 2 map hooks for every 48 inches (1220 mm) of map rail or fraction thereof. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under pressure with manufacturer's recommended flexible, waterproof adhesive. B. Assembly: Provide factory -assembled chalkboard and tackboard units, unless field -assembled units are required. 1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical joint system between abutting sections of chalkboards. 3. Provide manufacture's standard mullion trim at joints between chalkboards and tackboards. 2.5 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. w i VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 3 t Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine wall surfaces, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation of visual display boards. 1. Surfaces to receive chalkboards or markerboards shall be free of dirt, scaling paint, and projections or depressions that would affect smooth, finished surfaces of chalkboards or markerboards. 2. Surfaces to receive tackboards shall be dry and free of substances that would impair the bond between tackboards and substrate. 3. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Deliver factory -built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment. B. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. C. Coordinate Project -site -assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function properly. B. Clean units according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-4 r Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS I" PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C, 1.2 SUMMARY P R A. This Section includes toilet & shower compartments and screens as follows: 1. Type: Steel, color -coated finish. 2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored. 3. Screen Style: Wall hung. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation.Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment -mounted toilet accessories. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment o: screen indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 6-inch- (150-mm) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Wark. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabricat;on sc eduIG 'vvu: construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART2-PRODUCTS k TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-1 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. All American Metal Corp. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corp. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. ' 4. Capitol Partitions, Inc. 5. Compression Polymers Group; Comtec Industries. 6. Crane Plumbing; Sanymetal. 7. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 8. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 9. Lambaton/Universal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable. B. Steel Sheets for Color -Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphatized steel sheet that is leveled to stretcher -leveled flatness complying with the requirements of standards indicated below: 1. Electrolytically Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591 M), Class C, of the following minimum thicknesses: a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm). b. Doors: 0.0299 inch (0.75 mm). C. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm). 2. Hot -Dip Galvanized or Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M), in manufacturer's standard coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses: a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). -- b. Panels and Screens: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). C. Doors: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.079 inch (2.0 mm). C. Core Material for Metal -Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of resin4mpregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters. D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware. E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: 1. Material: Chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear -anodized aluminum. F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of the following material: 1. Material: Chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear -anodized aluminum. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 �.. Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 f G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish. H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. t� 1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment -mounted hardware, f accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Metal -Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Overhead -Braced -and -Floor -Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. D. Floor -and -Ceiling -Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. E. Wall -Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide metal -faced screens with integral full -height flanges for attachment to wall. F. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 244nch- (610-mm) wide in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm) wide out -swinging doors with a minimum 324nch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self -closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumpers at out -swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out -swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. w i TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 t, Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 2.4 ZINC- OR ZINC -ALLOY -COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying finishes. B. Color -Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Color: One color in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.5 SHOWER COMPARTMENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's complete handicap unit to include the following: 1. Shower curtain and rod. 2. Grab bars. 3. Fold -up seat. 4. Accessible shower receptor. 5. Handicap controls & adjustable height hand held shower head. B. Shower compartment to be similar to that manufactured by the Knickerbocker Partition Corp. as approved by Architect. 1. Materials and fabrication as indicated for toilet compartments. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or file joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead -Braced -and -Floor -Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written Instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4 Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95 A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 5 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 a SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments" for compartments, screens and accessories supplied with shower unit. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. C. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule. 1. Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, may be provided. 2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.5 COORDINATION r TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES iN1I1111151 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. —. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. 1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). f. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum -- nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411. C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 2.3 FABRICATION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 r+ I Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless -steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all -welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless -steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D. Framed Glass -Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass -mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper -resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. E. Mirror -Unit Hangers: Provide mirror -unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft -resistant installation, as follows: 1. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special toot to remove. F. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper -resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 r Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless -steel paper towel dispenser complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. American Specialties Model No. 04697-4 2. Semi -Recessed Mounted Type: Sized for minimum of 600 C-fold, or 800 multifold, or 1,100 single fold paper towels; with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset; and with removable 12 gal Stainless steel waste receptacle. B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide toilet tissue dispenser complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. American Specialties Model No. 0030 2. Type: Roll -in -reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage. 4. Material: Stainless steel 5. Operation: Second roll automatically drops in place. Theft resistant spindel. 6. Capacity: Designed for two rolls up to 51 /4". C. Soap Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide soap dispenser complying with the -- following: 1. Products: Available products include the following. _ a. American Specialties Model No. 0332 2. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Deck Mounted: Piston -and -spout -type unit with minimum 20-oz.capacity, polyethylene reservoir concealed below deck; brightly polished stainless -steel -- piston and spout; and chrome -plated deck escutcheon. a. Mounting: Designed for mounting on countertop. b. Soap Valve: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form. D. Grab Bar: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless -steel grab bar complying with the following: — 1. Products: Available products include the following a. American Specialties 3200 Series. -' 2. Stainless -Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 18 gauge. 3. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors. 4. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard slip -resistant texture. — 5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) for heavy-duty applications. E. Sanitary Napkin Vendor: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless -steel sanitary napkin vendor complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 4 Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97 r r" t. F a. American Specialties Model No. 0864 2. General: Fabricate cabinet of all -welded construction. Provide seamless door with returned edges and secured by tumbler lockset. Provide identification reading "Napkins" and 'Tampons"; brand -name advertising is not allowed. Capacity not less than 15 napkins and 20 tampons. 3. Mounting: Surface -mounted type. 4. Operation: No coin (free). F. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless -steel sanitary napkin disposal unit complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. American Specialties Model No. 0852 2. Partition -Mounted Type: With adjustable flanges for partition mounting to serve two toilet compartments; self -closing door; and reusable receptacle that is removable from one side. G. Seat -Cover Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide seat -cover dispenser complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. American Specialties Model No. 0477SM 2. Surface -Mounted Type: Stainless -steel unit with concealed opening at bottom for filling; minimum 250-seat-cover capacity. H. Mirror Unit: Where this designation is indicated, provide mirror unit complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. American Specialties Model No. 0620, 24"x36". 2. Stainless -Steel, Channel -Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from stainless -steel channels in manufacturer's standard satin or bright finish with square comers mitered to hairline joints and mechanically interlocked. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 5 I FCopyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2196 r SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Front -projection screens. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood backing for recessed screen installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from or refracted by screen material to that reflected perpendicularly i from a magnesium carbonate surface as determined per FS GG-S-001721)(1). t B. Half -Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the screen surface, to the most central position on perpendicular plane through the horizontal centerline of the screen where the gain is half of the peak gain. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of screen specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of projection screens. Include the following: 1. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. 2. Location of wiring connections. 3. Location of seams in viewing surfaces. 4. Connections to suspension systems for pendant- and recess -mounted screens. 5. Anchorage details. 6. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes. 7. Frame details. 8. Accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain projection screens through one source from a single manufacturer. ` Obtain each screen as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories. 6. PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 -1 P' r i Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/96 B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partitions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin. — B. Store rear -projection screens as recommended in manufacturer's written instructions and in manufacturer's protective packages until time of installation. C. Protect surfaces of rear -projection screens from damage due to abrasion, dust, and other conditions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FRONT -PROJECTION SCREENS A. Material and Viewing Surface of Front -Projection Screens: Provide screens manufactured from mildew and flame -resistant fabric of type indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the following requirements: 1. Glass -beaded viewing surface with gain characteristics complying with FS GG-S-00172D(1) for Type C screen surface. — 2. Material: Vinyl -coated glass -fiber fabric. 3. Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew -resistant screen fabrics as determined by FS 191 A/5760. 4. Seamless Construction: Provide screens in sizes indicated without seams. 5. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders. 6. Provide extra drop length of dimension indicated to comply with the following requirements for fabric color and location of drop length: a. Color: Same as viewing surface. b. Location: At top of screen. 7. Size of Viewing Surface: 60" x 60". B. Manually Operated Screens: Provide manufacturer's standard spring -roller -operated units designed and fabricated for wall or ceiling installation and consisting of case, screen, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. 1. Screen Case: Fabricated in 1 piece from steel sheet not less than 0.0299 inch (0.75 mm), with flat back design and vinyl covering or baked -enamel finish. Provide end caps with integral roller brackets and universal mounting brackets, finished to match end caps, for wall — or ceiling mounting. 2. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to a 3-inch- (75-mm-) diameter, rigid steel spring roller; bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat, with ends of slat protected by plastic caps, and saddle and pull attached to slat by screws. PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 2 r i Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC M6 C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Glass -Beaded Viewing Surfaces: C-L Glass Beaded; Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. 2. Manually Operated Front -Projection Screens: a. Apex; Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install front -projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered. 1. Test manually operated units to verify that screen operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 3.2 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If damage occurs despite such protection, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. 1. Provide temporary covering of rear -projection screens until time of Substantial Completion. Use type of covering approved by screen manufacturer that will effectively protect screen from abrasion, breakage, or other damage. END OF SECTION 11132 r" PROJECTION SCREENS 11132-3 i r Copyright 1992, AIA MASTERSPEC 4192 r SECTION 12541 - DRAPERY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. l r 1.2 SUMMARY I A. This Section includes the following: 1 1. Drapery fabric. 2. Mounting hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for hardware specified. B. Manufacturer's samples showing full range of colors and patterns available for fabric and linings to be selected by Architect. 4 C. Maintenance data for draperies, including how draperies should be cleaned. D. Certification that fabric complies with requirements for flame resistance. This certification shall be furnished to the Owner prior to final payment. Certificate shall state name of contractor, name of firm doing flame proofing treatment, date of treatment, date retreatment will be required, method of treatment, and shall have the signature of an officer or authorized representative of the firm furnishing the draperies. F 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Fabricator with not less than 3 years of production experience with drapery and curtains similar to requirements of this project. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Provide drapery materials identical to those tested for i the following fire performance characteristics, by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Test Method: NFPA 701, Small Scale Vertical Burn Test. 2. Rating: Pass. C. Single -Source Responsibility: Fabrication and installation shall be supervised by the same source. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIAL �.. Drapery 12541 -1 Copyright 1992, AIA MASTERSPEC 4192 A. Furnish extra material from same dye lot as drapery material installed, packaged with _ protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Drapery Materials: Deliver (5) five extra yards of material to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAPERY FABRIC MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Drapery and Lining Fabric a) Maharam (Ph..: 800-645-3943) b) Ara-Com,33 Ramland South, Orangeburg, NY 10962 (Ph.: 800-223- 5466) c) Frankel -- 2.2 DRAPERY FABRICATION A. Draperies shall be two and one half times (2.5x) fullness. B. Fabricate draperies to hang parallel to wall at end of run. Pleats shall hang vertically. C. Draperies at wall returns shall be flat to wall. Casement and track shall not be exposed to view. D. Align pattern vertically and horizontally. E. Thread: Color of fabric sewn. F. Hems: Full double -folded and finished with blind stitch. Even and flat with no rack, roll, or wrinkle. G. Ends: Square with covered lead weights placed at seams and in bottom corner of each panel. H. Seams: Flat, without puckers. Overcast serge raw edges. Remove salvages. Seams shall fall within a fold. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. When less than widths are used, place at edge of finished panel or at bracket return portion of rod. I. Fiber Content: Drapery shall be 100% Polyester, Flame Resistant. J. Identify each drapery with cloth label, attached at side return of each panel or pair, indicating location, finished width and length, and recommended cleaning procedures. _ 2.3 DRAPERY HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: Drapery 12541 - 2 A Copyright 1992, AIA MASTERSPEC 4/92 r,.. 1. Traverse Rods, and Track Mounting Hardware: a) Kirsch b) Graber 2.4 DRAPERY HARDWARE, GENERAL A. Rodding: Formed from .030 inch steel, precoated baked enamel. Slotted not more than r16" from each end bracket. Size track for span and weight of drapery indicated. B. Track Mounting: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting brackets or channels designed to support the weight of the track assembly and draperies plus force applied to operate draperies. C. Carriers: Manufacturer's standard, sized for span and weight of drapery indicated. D. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to track hardware and adjoining construction and to support track and r window treatment units under conditions of normal use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings for suitable condition where draperies and track hardware and adjoining construction and to support track and window treatment units under conditions of normal use. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Draperies and Tracks: Level, plumb, and secure. Drapery shall traverse without rubbing against track or trim. Drapery shall stack evenly when fully open and shall extend across opening with uniform appearance. Tracks shall be securely attached to wall inside drapery pocket. 3.3 ADJUSTING r, A. Draperies: Insure that pleats are 'set' prior to installation. Draperies shall hang without wrinkles. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of debris and cartons. 3.5 DRAPERY SCHEDULE A. At Office 123 across each of two windows at east wall. 1. Pinch Pleat Drapery: Single drape to cover full width of each window. Drapery r- fi 1 Drapery 12541 - 3 Copyright 1992, AIA MASTERSPEC 4/92 shall stack in the open position at each side of window. Drapery shall extend approximately 6" below the sill of the window. Field verify height and width of existing windows (Approximately 4' high x 10'-8" wide.). 2. Hardware: Traverse rod full width. B. At Office 130 across each of two (2) windows at east wall. 1. Pinch Pleat Drapey: Single drape to cover full width of each window. Drapery shall stack in the open position at each side of window. Drapery shall extend approximately 6" below the sill of the window. Field verify height and width of existing windows (Approximately 4' high x 3'-4" wide.). 2. Hardware: Traverse rod full width. END OF SECTION Drapery 12541 - 4 AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NUMBER 99042 MECHANICAL LIA FAA OFFICE RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL ................. 1-13 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES ............................. 1-5 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS ................................. 1-7 15260 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM ......................... 1-2 15320 AIR DISTRIBUTION .................................. 1-4 15330 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ............................. 1-3 15500 EQUIPMENT .................................... - .. 1-7 15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 1-2 : 7F 1 r . r;S 4 s Sitis The seal appearing on this document was authorized by Dwayne Agnew, 37645 on AM 1922. Alterotion of o sealed document without proper notification to the responsible engineer is on offense under the Texas Engineering Practice Act. 7 SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL PART 1-GENERAL CHECKING DOCUMENTS: The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor f with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets E or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. GENERAL: In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-1 r" The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as condensate drain lines. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. Piping and ducts serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention _ before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M" or "P" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-2 DIMENSIONS: k Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. INSPECTION OF SITE: The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. ELECTRICAL WIRING: All electric wiring of every character, will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-3 r may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL: Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. SHOP DRAWINGS: Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details , he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-4 r L. i Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall �• designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. TESTING: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. Notify the Architect a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all tests. LAWS. CODES AND ORDINANCES: All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. TERMINOLOGY: Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. POI "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building components in place. 7 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-5 "Exposed" areas are. all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP: The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. COORDINATION OF TRADES: The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items .furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. All items specified under Division 15 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-6 FCUTTING AND PATCHING: The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. The Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. PAINTING: Painting for Division 15 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. SEALING AROUND PIPES. DUCTS, ETC.: The Contractor installing pipes, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. ACCESS PANELS: 6 Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required ` through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. 7, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-7 i RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS: There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. SALVAGE MATERIALS: The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, and other items associated with the mechanical and plumbing systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The .Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All items not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. _ INSTALLATION DRAWINGS: It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, �- whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-8 r Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section.of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. MARKING OF PIPE: The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most a visible. Markers shall conform completely with "The Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems (ANSI A131 1981). Markers shall have ANSI specified color coded background, color of legend and legend letter size. Markers shall be equal to Seton Set Mark Pipe Markers MARKING MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS: The Contractor shall mark each manual balancing damper with flourescent yellow 1-3/16" wide plastic flagging tape equal to Seton 25468. Tape shall hang minimum 12" below duct. IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-9 spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: r 1. AC Units 2. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 3. Exhaust Air Fans 4. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. OPERATING MANUALS: Prepare and submit 3 copies:of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Wiring diagrams. 4. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 5. Parts list for all items. 6. Name and address of each vendor. GUARANTEE: Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate.. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-10 F COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS: Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION: rBefore calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. YEAR 2000 PERFORMANCE WARRANTY For purposes of this warranty, the following definitions shall apply: "Accurately" shall be defined to include: 1. Calculations correctly performed using four digit year processing; 2. Functionality on-line, batch, including but not limited to, entry, inquiry, maintenance and r' updates support four digit year processing; 3. Interfaces and reports must support four digit year processing; 4. Successful translation into year 2000 with valid date (e.g. CC/YY/MM/DD) without human intervention. Additional representations for week, hour, minute and second, if required, �^ complies with the international standard ISO 8601:1988, "Data elements and interchange I formats - Information exchange Representation of dates and time." When ordinal dates are 4 used, the ISO standard format CCYYDDD is used; 5. Processing with four digit year after transition to any date beyond the year 2000 without human intervention; 6. Correct results in forward and backward date calculations spanning century boundaries; 7. Correct leap year calculations; and 8. Correct forward and backward date calculations spanning century boundaries, including conversion of previous years stored, recorded or entered as two digits. 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-11 r 4 "Date integrity" shall mean all manipulations of time -related data (dates, durations, days of week, etc.) will produce desired results for all valid date values within the application domain. "Explicit century" shall mean date elements in interfaces and data storage permit specifying century to eliminate date ambiguity. "Extraordinary actions" shall be defined to mean any action outside the normal documented processing steps identified in the product's reference documentation. "General integrity" shall mean no value for current date will cause interruptions in desired operation - especially from the 20th to 21st centuries. "Implicit century" shall mean for any data element without century, the correct century is unambiguous for all manipulations involving that element. "Product" or "products" shall be defined to include, but is not limited to, any supplied or supported hardware, software, firmware and/or micro code. "Valid date" shall be defined as a date containing a four digit year, a two digit month and a two digit day., or the ISO 8601:1988, Data elements - Information Exchange - Representation of dates and times". When ordinal dates are used, ISO standard format of CCYYDDD is used. The contractor warrants that product(s) delivered and installed under this contract shall be able to accurately process valid date data when used in accordance with the product documentation provided by the contractor and require no extraordinary actions on the part of the Owner or its personnel. Products under this Contract possess general integrity, date integrity, explicit and implicit century capabilities. If the Contract requires that specific products must perform as a system in accordance with the foregoing warranty, then the warranty shall apply to those listed products as a system. The duration of this warranty and the remedies available the Owner for breach of this warranty shall be as defined in, and subject to, the terms and conditions contained in this Contract; provided, that notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in such commercial warranty or warranties, the _ remedies available to the Owner under this warranty shall include repair or replacement of any supplied product whose non-compliance is discovered and made known to the contractor in writing within one year after final acceptance, as that term is defined elsewhere in the contract. Nothing in this warranty shall be considered to limit any rights or remedies the Owner may otherwise have under this contract with respect to defects other than Year 2000 performance. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-12 Prior to final acceptance the Owner may require demonstration of correct system operation without manual intervention before and after roll over between the following dates: Dec 31, 1998 - Jan 1, 1999 Sep 9, 1999 - Sep 10, 1999 Dec 31, 1999 - Jan 1, 2000 Feb 28, 2000 - Feb 29, 2000 Feb 29, 2000 - Mar 1, 2000 Mar 31, 2000 - Apr 1, 2000 Apr 30, 2000 - May 1, 2000 Dec 31, 2000 - Jan 1, 2001 Feb 28, 2001 - Mar 1, 2001 Dec 31, 2009 - Jan 1, 2010 Dec 31, 2027 - Jan 1, 2028 END OF SECTION 15000 Tests for use of 9's as control code errors Tests for use of 9's as control code errors Tests century digits rollover Tests recognition of leap year Tests recognition of leap year Tests recognition of leap year Tests recognition of leap year Tests millennium rollover Tests recognition of no leap year Tests normal decade rollover Tests normal decade rollover GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 150W-13 r r FSECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. �• Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 1 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-117 Type H No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 l Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3 Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-1 VALVES: Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, - bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be two piece. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems of adequate length for the handle to clear the insulation and jacket. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as _ required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-2 FLASHING AND SEALANT PANS: r• Flash around all pipes passing through flat roofs with sheet lead not less than 2-1/2 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. { Small lines thru flat roofs shall be installed thru sealant pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with sealant. PIPE SLEEVES: k Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to 3M No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. ESCUTCHEONS. CEILING PLATES: Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. INTERIOR TRENCHING: Trenches for underfloor lines inside the building shall be properly excavated. Where floors are to be poured over these lines, they shall be backfilled, tamped, and settled with water. Where necessary to cut floors for installation of underfloor lines, the floor shall be saw cut and patched back to a flush and level condition. All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations shall be disposed of as directed by the Architect. FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-3 r Push -On Pipe: The inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. The circular rubber gasket shall be flexed inward and inserted in the gasket recess of the bell socket. A thin film of gasket lubricant shall be applied to either the inside surface of the gasket or the spigot end of the pipe or both. Gasket lubricant shall be as supplied by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Architect. The spigot end of the pipe shall be entered into the socket with care used to keep the joint from _ contacting the ground. The joint shall then be completed by forcing the plain end to the bottom of the socket with a forked tool or jack type tool or other device. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before asesmbly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the joint. Field cut pipe lengths shall be filed or ground to resemble the spigot end of such pipe as manufactured. Complete assembly instructions from the pipe manufacturer shall be followed. No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburf pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or •-- prevent leaks is prohibited. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95% tin, 5% antimony, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing. Low temperature solder such as 50150 or 40/60 will not be permitted. REPAIR OF LEAKS: All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails ^` to stop the leak. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. ALIGNMENT AND GRADES: General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-4 r Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not r interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-5 t r I ro SECTION 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphalts or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and Type L copper for lines smaller than 2". C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K soft drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lb. banded malleable iron fittings for pipe 2" and smaller; welded fittings for pipe 2-1/2" and larger. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and r. drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-1 r bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through _ them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. PLUMBING FIXTURES: The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. All threaded supply fittings shall have back flow preventers. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. Controls for water closet flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas. All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance standards. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-2 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE: Water Closet WC'A' Bowl Eljer 091-0125 water saver, 1.6 GPF, elongated bowl, siphon jet, standard 14" height closet combination with anti -siphon float valve, and flat bolt covers. Stop & Riser E1jer 802-0225 Seat Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Water Closet WC'B' Bowl Eljer 091-1175 or 091-1180 water saver, 1.6 GPF, elongated bowl, siphon jet, handicapped 17" height closet combination with anti -siphon float valve, and flat bolt covers. TAS compliant. Stop & Riser Eljer 802-0225 Seat Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Urinal U'A' Fixture Eljer 161-1090 vitreous china, wall hung, siphon jet, with chair carrier, and 3/4" top spud. Mount at 24" height. Flush Valve Sloan Regal 186-1. Urinal U'B' Fixture Eljer 161-1090 vitreous china, wall hung, siphon jet, with chair carrier, and 3/4" top spud. Mount at 17" height. TAS compliant. Flush Valve Sloan Regal 186-1. TAS compliant. Lavatory L Fixture Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x 18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings. TAS compliant. Supply 557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator. TAS compliant. Tailpiece 803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-3 P-trap 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Stops & Risers 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. Insulation Truebro 102W insulation for p-trap, offset tailpiece, and hot and cold supplies. Sink S Fixture Elkay LRAD-3319, 33" x 19-1/2" x 5" deep, double compartment, 18 gauge type 304 self rimming stainless steel with 4 holes. TAS compliant. Supply Eljer 717-1280, chrome finish swing spout single lever unit with aerator, hose and spray, 3/8" tubing inlets. TAS compliant. Strainer Two Eljer 803-0580 strainer and crumb cup. Tailpiece Eljer 803-0530, offset drain. P-trap Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Stops, risers Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. Insulation Truebro 102W for p-trap, offset tailpiece, hot & cold supplies. Electric Water Cooler EWC Fixture Elkay EHFSA-8 for the handicapped with stainless steel receptor and enamel cabinet. TAS compliant. P-trap Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Stop Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and wheel handle stop. Shower Head SH Fixture Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower control with check valves, stops, and chrome plated metal lever, and hand shower with SS 59" flexible hose, supply elbow and flange, swivel connector, and 24" chrome plated glide bar with adjustable shower mount. TAS compliant. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-4 r DRAINS: Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. All floor drains shall have auxiliary drainage rim, and deep seal p-trap. Shower Drain SD Fixture Wade No. W-1102 with 5" NB top, cast iron body. i � INSULATION: r Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white draft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber barrier between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. Insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. Domestic Cold Water, Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" r" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. ESlope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to.produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-5 r Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported as detailed on the drawings. Spacing of supports shall be as specified under "Hangers and Supports". TESTING: Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. . Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. Gas Lines: Test with 15 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. DISINFECTING: After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-6 The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less than 24 hours. At the end. of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. END OF SECTION 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-7 r t. SECTION 15260 - REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL ` NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTAL: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. r t SCOPE: Furnish and install the necessary refrigerant lines, fittings, refrigerant controls, etc. to properly interconnect the condensing units and the evaporators. PART 2 - MATERIALS PIPING: Refrigerant piping shall be ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn copper tubing assembled with wrought copper fittings. Braze joints with AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. Flood system with nitrogen when brazing. ' INSULATION: The refrigerant suction lines shall be insulated with 3/4" thick Armstrong "Armaflex" foamed plastic insulation threaded on the piping. Seal vapor tight. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM: s Piping shall be adequately supported to prevent the transmission of vibration and noise into the building structure. All refrigerant piping shall run in a neat manner parallel to the building construction and shall be arranged with adequate clearance for the suction line insulation. Purge continuously with dry nitrogen while soldering. r Refrigerant lines shall be sized in accordance with the best refrigeration practice and shall be designed to afford a controlled distribution of the refrigerant and a ready return of oil to the compressor crankcases. Particular care shall be exercised in the sizing and design of suction lines to assure that r.. liquid refrigerant or oil pockets will not be formed during partial compressor operation with l subsequent "slugging". TESTING: All refrigerant piping shall be tested at 300 psi with dry nitrogen for 4 hours. Finally after charging, r„ go over each installation with a halide torch. Correct all leaks. F REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 15260-1 f" f EVACUATING: After testing the piping system, evacuate the system to 200 microns. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen to raise the pressure to atmospheric. Re -evacuate the system to 200 microns. Close the vacuum pump suction valve and stop the pump. Backseat the compressor valve and allow the system to stand under vacuum for a minimum of 12 hours. If the vacuum reading remains unchanged, the system may be charged. END OF SECTION 15260 15260-2 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM I r SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. PART 2 - PRODUCTS METAL DUCTWORK: Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. r t AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-1 I: DUCT LINER: All sheet metal supply and return air duct shall be lined. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. Use 100 % adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. DUCT SEALER: All supply air and exhaust air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. Ductmate PROseal or Hardcast will be considered equal. AIR CONTROL DEVICES: Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a volume damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off to achieve the final air balance. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 24". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be — constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-2 F Each volume damper shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 1200 right angle worm gear regulator with 301 concealed damper regulator. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. FLEXIBLE DUCT: Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct @ shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. Flex duct shall not exceed 4'-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 2" thick duct insulation to make-up the difference in length. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: ! Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" �,.. between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the flexible material itself. F Flexible connectors for indoor application shall be fire resistant, waterproof, and mildew resistant ,r coated neoprene. Flexible connectors shall have the following minimum characteristics: Weight: 30 ounce Burst Pressure: 750 lb. Tongue Tear: 25/20 lb Tensile Strength: 5001500 lb Flexible connector shall be equal to Ductmate PROFlex Neoprene. Flexible connectors for outdoor application shall be fire resistant, waterproof, mildew resistant, and U.V. resistant hypalon. Flexible connectors shall have the following minimum characteristics: Weight: 24 ounce r- Burst Pressure: 750 lb. Tongue Tear: 20/ 15 lb Tensile Strength: 500/500 lb Flexible connector shall be equal to Ductmate PROFlex Hypalon. AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-3 k " ROUND DUCT TAPS: Contractor shall provide bellmouth take -.offs at branch duct locations. Take -offs shall be equal to Buckley Air Products. Bellmouth fittings shall be Model BM-D with damper. In areas where sufficient duct height is not available, provide Model 3300 rectangular to round bellmouth fitting with damper. Bellmouth shall have 1.5" radius. Bellmouths shall be constructed of heavy-duty galvanized steel with bead. Bellmouths shall include an air-tite neoprene gasket to ensure a tight fitting with minimal leakage. Pre -drilled holes shall be provided for quick mounting. Standard damper hardware shall be constructed of 26-gauge galvanized material with a quadrant damper with stand-off bracket and tight fitting gasketing to ensure minimal leakage at pivot point. RECTANGULAR DUCT TAPS: Contractor shall provide bellmouth take -offs at branch duct locations. Take -offs shall be equal to Buckley Air Products. Bellmouth fittings shall be Model RBM-D with damper. In areas where sufficient duct height is not available, provide field fabricated 45 degree tap with volume damper. Bellmouths shall be constructed of heavy-duty galvanized steel. Bellmouths shall include an air-tite neoprene gasket to ensure a tight fitting with minimal leakage. Pre -drilled holes shall be provided for quick mounting. Standard damper hardware shall be constructed of 26-gauge galvanized material with a quadrant damper with stand-off bracket and tight fitting gasketing to ensure minimal leakage at pivot point. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES: Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus,. Metal -Aire, Price, or Krueger will be acceptable. END OF SECTION 15320 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-4 SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE GRINNELL FIG. Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller CT-109 copper plated Riser Clamp Copper Tubing 4" and smaller CT-121 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 108 or 65 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 260 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 260 Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 65 Wall bracket All 194, 195, or 199 Pipe Clamps Steel 2" and smaller 261 Pipe Rest All 62 Beam Clamps All 133, 134, 225, 92, 93 Adjuster All 230 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-1 HANGER RODS: All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Size of Size of Steel Pipe Copper Pipe Cast Iron Pipe 3/8" 2" & smaller 2" & smaller 2" & smaller 1/2" 2-1/2", 3" 2-1/2",311, 4" 3" 5/8" 4" 6" 4" 3/4" 6" 8" 6" HANGER SPACING: All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for lines. However, hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or required by code. Size of Line Steel Copper Cast Iron 3/4" & smaller 5 5 1" 7 6 1-1/4" 7 6 1-1/2" 9 8 5 2" 10 8 5 2-1/2" 10 9 5 3" 10 10 5 4" 10 10 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS: All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-2 i Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. Pipe and tubing shall be supported such that dissimilar metals are not in contact. Provide hangers and supports of common material or provide isolation of dissimilar metals. Pipe and tubing shall be supported such that there is no contact with building components subject to movement or vibration; e.g., metal studs. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation. 4 Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. �.. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted t outside the insulation. The insulation on horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom half of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type fully encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/4" wide lacquered steel band at each end. DUCT HANGERS: All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION 15330 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-3 4 . SECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2 - PRODUCTS MOTORS: Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, �.. with a service factor of 1.0. EQUIPMENT 15500-1 t: Fractional 1/6 HP and Larger: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Motors shall have the minimum performance as scheduled below. HP RPM FRAME MIN EFF MIN POWER FACTOR 1 1800 143T 82 84 1-1/2 1800 145T 84 85 2 1800 145T 84 85 3 1800 182T 86 86 5 1800 184T 87 87 7-1/2 1800 213T 88 86 STARTERS: Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details. FLUE VENTS: Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices including water heaters. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight. WATER HEATER: Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes. Refer to drawings for capacities. EQUIPMENT 15500-2 HOT WATER CIRCULATOR: The contractor shall furnish and install an all bronze in -line circulator as shown on the drawings. The pump shall be Bell & Gossett Model No. 100 or approved equal, directly driven by a 1/12 HP self -aligning flexible coupled oil -lubricated motor, 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase, 1750 RPM. The pump shall be suitable for 125 lb. working pressure. The um shall have a round and polished steel shaft with integral thrust collar. The shaft shall be pump g P g supported by two horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil. The pump is to be equipped rwith a watertight seal to prevent leakage. Mechanical seal faces to be carbon on ceramic. The motor shall be non -overloading at any point on pump curve. The motor shall be of the open, drip -proof, sleeve -bearing, quiet -operating, rubber -mounted construction. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload protectors. The pump shall be supported such that the weight of the pump is not carried by the adjoining pipe. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER: Electric water heater shall be a packaged electric water heater with welded steel, glass lined tank, factory insulated and jacketed. Provide with a drain. Heating elements shall be direct immersion elements. Control shall be automatic. Thermostat shall be immersion type. Thermostat shall operate the magnetic contactors. Master Control Panel: Prewired and factory installed to contain the contactors, wiring and terminals. Provide with magnesium anode. Provide a Watts T & P relief valve piped full size to floor drain. Unit shall be UL listed. FANS: The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and C drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. r- EQUIPMENT 15500-3 f Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall have factory applied finish. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. Exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. All fans shall have bird screens. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. It shall be of welded construction. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Acme or Greenheck. ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SINGLE ZONE: The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop units as shown and scheduled on the contract documents. The units shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Lennox or York. General Unit Description: Units furnished and installed shall be combination gas heating/electric cooling packaged rooftops as scheduled on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be ARI Standard 210 certified. Units shall consist of insulated weather tight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return air filters, supply motors and drives, gas -fired heating section. Units shall be 100 % factory run tested and fully charged with R-22 Units shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate caution areas. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification. Capacity: Some latitude will be allowed to compensate for differing unit manufacturers. However, units shall not be submitted with total capacity less than 10% below the scheduled capacity nor less than 5 % of the sensible capacity. EQUIPMENT 15500-4 r Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 500 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B 117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/maintenance from one side of the unit. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exists, it shall be double hemmed and gasket sealed. Access Panels: Water and air tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section. Downflow unit's base pans shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and return openings for water integrity. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the units and shall be accessible thru access panels. One inch thick glass fiber disposable media filters shall be provided with the provisions within the unit for 2 inch thick filters to be field provided and installed. Fans and Motors: Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan. Provide self -aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically balanced supply fans. Provide units 6 1/4 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves. Outdoor and indoor fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal overload protection. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key -way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Gas Fired Heating Section: Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit. UL approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide capability for gas piping connection through side of unit. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment. Gas burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative pressure gas valve, manual shut-off, hot surface ignition, and flame sensing safety control. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Upon a failure to ignite, two attempts of ignition will occur before lockout of the ignition system. Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built-in thermal overload protection on fan motor. Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of free floating design manufactured from 18-gauge aluminized steel. Factory pressure and leak tested. Heat exchanger shall be warrantied for 10 years. { w; EQUIPMENT 15500-5 Limit Controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow. Evaporator Coil: Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure test at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig. Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or galvanized steel with external connections. Condenser Section: Provide internally finned 3/8 " seamless copper tube mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Factory pressure tested to 450 psig. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. The screen shall be installed on the 24 gauge stand-off clips to allow 1" clearance between coil and screen. Refrigeration System: Provide hermetic reciprocating compressors with heat treated forged steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, internal suction and discharge valves, crankcase heater, and centrifugal oil pump. Internally isolated motors on springs. Provide suction gas cooled motor with over temperature and over current protection. Compressors shall be warrantied for 5 years. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard or manufacturer shall furnish unit with installed low ambient controls to allow for operation down to 0 degree F. For field installed low ambient accessory, the manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized serviceman that will assure proper installation and operation. Provide with thermostatic temperature control in the compressor windings, to protect against excessive temperatures, high and low pressure conditions. Provide each unit with factory supplied and piped liquid line filter drier, suction and liquid line Schraeder valves. Outside Air: Provide minimum outside air intake with hood, inlet screen, and damper. Operating Controls: Provide NEC Class II, adjustable zone control to control heating stages in sequence with delay between stages, compressor stages and supply fan to maintain zone temperature setting. Provide automatic changeover control with (off -heat -auto -cool), and fan control switch (auto -on). 2. Locate zone control in room as shown. EQUIPMENT 15500-6 ROOF MOUNTING FRAME: A 13" high galvanized roof mounting frame supplied by the unit manufacturer shall be furnished and installed for the unit. This frame shall include a 2"x4" nailer secured to the sides to facilitate flashing. This frame shall exactly fit the unit and shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association. This frame shall be set level and squared according to the manufacturers instructions and secured to the building as detailed on the plans. All connections to the unit shall be made from bottom within the confines of the frame. SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP: Furnish and install the split system heat pumps shown in the drawings. The units shall be as manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric or approved equal. The indoor unit shall be wall mounted with supplementary electric heater. Unit shall have integral drain water lift -up mechanism. The cabinet shall be white. The outdoor unit shall have a rotary compressor warranted for 5 years. The casing shall be fully weatherproof for outdoor installation. The microprocessor controls shall be factory wired with field installed remote pendant control station. The system shall operate on R-22. The indoor unit and outdoor unit shall be connected by dry -charged refrigerant tubing. END OF SECTION 15500 EQUIPMENT 15500-7 F i SECTION 15600 - TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. r SCOPE: This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools t and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting t of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. t Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each �. conditioned space. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. r' 2. Air quantities at each exhaust air handling device. 3. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other C components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terns of CFM handled. 4. Motor current readings at each fan. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-1 When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. INSTRUCTIONS: During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-2 7 AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. PROJECT NUMBER 99042 LIA FAA OFFICE RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 16000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL ........................................... 1-9 16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING ........................1-2 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS................................................................1-8 16120 CONDUCTORS..................................................................................1-4 16140 WIRING DEVICES..............................................................................1-4 16180 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS..................................1-3 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION..........................................................1-2 16441 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES..................................1-2 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING..............................................................1-2 16470 PANELBOARDS.................................................................................1-4 16475 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES ..... 1-2 16500 LIGHTING........................................................................................1-5 r*: I-I'llEES .....IR1Gil !1T. '0 f` 1. •., 7 FSECTION 16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. ELECTRICAL LINES: General: In general, the electrical lines to be installed under these specifications shall be run as l indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to t conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of electrical lines and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these • standards. General Construction: The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. Field Conditions: The electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of electrical lines, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. Locations of Electrical Devices: The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. Space Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. Working Drawings: The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-1 i Order of Precedence: Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The installation shall be coordinated with the work of all other trades. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. — 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. Equipment Connections: Conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. Exceptions and Inconsistencies: Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. Intent of Drawings and Specifications: The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. Examination of Drawings and Specifications: Each bidder shall examine the Drawings and Specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective Electrical drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. DIMENSIONS: General: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. INSPECTION OF SITE: General: The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-2 F r ELECTRICAL WIRING: Description: All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. PROGRESS OF WORK: General: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: General: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: Materials: All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects and undamaged. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. r� Samples: The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. Transportation: The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. Appurtenances: The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. Workmanship: The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS: Where a definite material of a specific manufacturer is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a base for competitive bidding, and each bidder shall include in his bid sum � the cost of the named materials or manufactured items. 6 r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-3 I Where practical, in mentioning the name of a specific manufacturer, the specifications list alternate manufacturers whose products are acceptable. In each such case, the bidder shall list the equipment item and opposite it shall list the name of the manufacturer whose product he proposes to use. This list of manufacturers shall be submitted with his proposal, and shall be a part thereof. It is recognized that acceptable materials are offered by manufacturers other than those named in the specifications. Each bidder may therefore submit, with his proposal, all requests for substitutions which he desires to make, together with the adjustment to be made in .his bid sum in each case should the substitute be accepted. Requests for permission to make substitutions will not be considered subsequent to the opening of bids except in the case of an emergency which would result in delay of the project. PROTECTION OF APPARATUS: General: The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the uncompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. PERMITS. FEE, ETC.: General: The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from _ the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including electric services. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. TESTING: General: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. LAWS. CODES AND ORDINANCES: General: All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the — work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-4 r TERMINOLOGY: "Furnish, Provide, Install": Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. Materials: Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. "Shall": The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. "Section": "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. "Project": "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. Multiple Items: In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. COOPERATION: General: The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. COORDINATION OF TRADES: General: The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details Ceiling Mounted Items: Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Electrical Items: All items specified under Divisions 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-5 7, CUTTING AND PATCHING: General: The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the t expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. _ Structural Members: No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. Patching: The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. Coordination: Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required with all trades. Existing Surfaces: In all spaces where new work under Division 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. Masonry Walls: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. PAINTING: Painting for Division 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal is visible. LARGE APPARATUS: General: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job r- by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-6 r RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS: r" $; General: There are portions of the existing electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. SALVAGE MATERIALS: The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, conduit, wiring, panelboards, light fixtures, and other items associated with the electrical system where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the Contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All items not claimed become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. INSTALLATION DRAWINGS: General: It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EOUIPMENT: General: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-7 Discrepancies: Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. YEAR 2000 PERFORMANCE WARRANTY For purposes of this warranty, the following definitions shall apply: 1. "Accurately" shall be defined to include: 2. Calculations correctly performed using four digit year processing; 3. Functionality on-line, batch, including but not limited to, entry, inquiry, maintenance and updates support four digit year processing; 4. Interfaces and reports must support four digit year processing; 5. Successful translation into year 2000 with valid date (e.g. CC/YY/MM/DD) without human intervention. Additional representations for week, hour, minute and second, if required, complies with the international standard ISO 8601:1988, "Data elements and interchange formats - Information exchange Representation of dates and time." When ordinal dates are used, the ISO standard format CCYYDDD is used; — 6. Processing with four digit year after transition to any date beyond the year 2000 without human intervention; — 7. Correct results in forward and backward date calculations spanning century boundaries; 8. Correct leap year calculations; and 9. Correct forward and backward date calculations spanning century boundaries, including conversion of previous years stored, recorded or entered as two digits. "Date integrity" shall mean all manipulations of time -related data (dates, durations, days of week, etc.) will produce desired results for all valid date values within the application domain. .., "Explicit century" shall mean date elements in interfaces and data storage permit specifying century to eliminate date ambiguity. L "Extraordinary actions" shall be defined to mean any action outside the normal documented processing steps identified in the product's reference documentation. "General integrity" shall mean no value for current date will cause interruptions in desired operation - especially from the 20th to 21st centuries. "Implicit century" shall mean for any data element without century, the correct century is unambiguous for all manipulations involving that element. "Product" or. "products" shall be defined to include, but is not limited to, any supplied or supported hardware, software, firmware and/or micro code. "Valid date" shall be defined as a date containing a four- digit year, a two digit month and a two digit day., or the ISO 8601:1988, Data elements Information Exchange - Representation of dates and times". When ordinal dates are used, ISO standard format of CCYYDDD is used. G GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-8 I The contractor warrants that product(s) delivered and installed under this contract shall be able to accurately process valid date data when used in accordance with the product documentation provided by the contractor and require no extraordinary actions on the part of the Owner or its personnel. Products under this Contract possess general integrity, date integrity, explicit and implicit century capabilities. If the Contract requires that specific products must perform as a system in accordance with the foregoing warranty, then the warranty shall apply to those listed products as a system. The duration of this warranty and the remedies available the Owner for breach of this warranty shall be as defined in, and subject to, the terms and conditions contained in this Contract; provided, that notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in such commercial warranty or warranties, the remedies available to the Owner under this warranty shall include repair or replacement of any supplied product whose non-compliance is discovered and made known to the contractor in writing within one year after final acceptance, as that term is defined elsewhere in the contract. Nothing in this warranty shall be considered to limit any rights or remedies the Owner may otherwise have under this contract with respect to defects other than Year 2000 performance. Prior to final acceptance the Owner may require demonstration of correct system operation without manual intervention before and after roll over between the following dates: Dec 31, 1998 - Jan 1, 1999 Sep 9, 1999 - Sep 10, 1999 Dec 31, 1999 - Jan 1, 2000 Feb 28, 2000 - Feb 29, 2000 Feb 29, 2000 - Mar 1, 2000 Mar 31, 2000 - Apr 1, 2000 Apr 30, 2000 - May 1, 2000 Dec 31, 2000 - Jan 1, 2001 Feb 28, 2001 - Mar 1, 2001 Dec 31, 2009 - Jan 1, 2010 Dec 31, 2027 - Jan 1, 2028 Tests for use of 9's as control code errors Tests for use of 9's as control code errors Tests century digits rollover Tests recognition of leap year Tests recognition of leap year Tests recognition of leap year Tests recognition of leap year Tests millennium rollover Tests recognition of no leap year Tests normal decade rollover Tests normal decade rollover END OF SECTION 16000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-9 r SECTION 16060 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING ,.. PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division l Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: Field Measurements: Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. Abandoned Circuits: Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Field Conditions: Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner and Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. Existing Conditions: Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. PREPARATION: Demolition: Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK: General: Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of the Drawings, General r" Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections. New Construction: Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. Abandoned Wiring: Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. Exposed Conduit: Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-1 Abandoned Devices: Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. Abandoned Equipment: Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. `- Adjacent Construction: Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Existing wiring to remain active: Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. \ Extension of existing wiring: Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, as specified. CLEANING AND REPAIR: Existing Materials: Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged �- circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. Lighting Fixtures: Remove existing lighting fixtures for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps and broken electrical parts. Ballasts: Replace the ballasts in all existing lighting fixtures with new ballasts as specified under Section 16500 - LIGHTING. INSTALLATION: Relocated Materials: Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1 of the Specifications. END OF SECTION 16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-2 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on all conduit, conduit fittings, raceway, outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction boxes. SCOPE: Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical raceways, conduit, rwireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all fittings, supporting devices, and other accessories required. I REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING: General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of the General Requirements. Accept delivery of conduit, raceway, pull and junction and outlet boxes on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect conduit and raceway from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. Routing of Conduit: Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. Conduit routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. The contractor shall verify all site conditions and shall route as required to complete the wiring system. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS CONDUITS: Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield) or interlocked aluminum construction; conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or approved equivalent. �-- Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips or interlocked aluminum construction as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed and labeled; Electri-flex type "LA" or approved equivalent. CONDUIT FITTINGS: Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or. cabinet. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (Compression and Set Screw Couplings): Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and.connectors. Couplings shall conform to ANSI/NEMA FBI. The connectors shall have insulated throats so as to not damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; T & B 440 Series or approved equivalent couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. — Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; T & B 5271 Series or approved equivalent adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. Couplings and Terminations for PVC Conduit: Type 80 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or approved equivalent. PVC couplings and solvent cement by the same manufacturer as the PVC conduit. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-2 F OUTLET BOXES: General: Outlet boxes shall be UL listed of sizes and types specified. Sheet Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City, Appleton or approved equivalent. PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES: Description: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboards cabinets with covers of the same gauge as cabinets, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. SURFACE RACEWAY: Surface Raceway: Galvanized Steel with snap on covers, UL listed and'sized as shown on the Drawings. Finish surface raceway with all fittings, couplings, hangers, boxes and accessories as required for a complete installation. The surface raceway shall be finished in the manufacturer's standard buff finish. As manufactured by Wiremold, Walker/Parkersburg or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: General: Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes and enclosures for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WIRING METHODS: Description: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS: Outdoor Locations Above Grade: 1. Type: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. Wet and Damp Locations: 1. Type: Rigid Steel Conduit. 2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. I RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-3 l Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed within 6 feet of finished floor: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. , 3. Exposed above 6 feet of finished floor where not subject to mechanical damage: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 4. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS: Installation: Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard Of Installation." Install raceways, boxes and enclosures according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Conduits: All exposed runs shall be installed level and square and at proper elevations, parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Provide adequate headroom. Bends: Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Make field bends ^' with approved bending devices. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless, otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. -� Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. Conduit Bodies: Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction. Expansion Joints: Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansions and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. ._ Completion: Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches long and not more than 24 inches long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. Connections to Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Use maximum of 6 feet flexible metal conduit at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within twelve inches of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at --� least six inches from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-4 F Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space q between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke ` and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building PM materials through which the raceway passes. Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull line. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. JOINING AND TERMINATING CONDUITS: Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. Joining Electrical Metallic Tubing: Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten securely. Joining PVC Conduit: Join PVC conduit using cement as recommended by the manufacturer. Wipe PVC conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty minutes, minimum. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed. CONDUIT SUPPORTS: Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-5 Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on galvanized steel hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment of conduit during wire installation. Above Removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling _ to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut or approved equal angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. Group related conduits together. Provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduit. INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES: Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install in locations as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to weather and wet locations. Location of Boxes: Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated or specified in section for outlet device. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended _ purpose. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Orientation of Boxes: Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140 - WIRING DEVICES. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-6 j' Above Accessible Ceilings: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed lighting fixture. Locate outlet boxes to allow lighting fixtures positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. Coordination: Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. Adjacent Devices: Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. Masonry Boxes: Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. Wall Boxes: Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. Ceiling Boxes: Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Do not fasten to ceiling support wires or ceiling panels. Support boxes independently of conduit. Gang Boxes: Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Branch Circuits: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained. Other System: Boxes serving other systems shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. Identify the wiring system by name (Fire Alarm, P.A., Telephone, Data Cable, Nurse Call, Security, Closed-circuit TV, Etc.). RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-7 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS: General: Surface raceway shall be installed parallel to the wall line in a neat and orderly manner. The surface raceway shall be mounted using only such fasteners that are recommended by the manufacturer for the type of surface material encountered. Paint raceway to match surface installation. Usage: Surface raceways and boxes shall be installed on all existing inaccessible walls where concealed conduit is not possible. All raceways and boxes shall be painted to match existing wall conditions. END OF SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-5 T SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on conductor and insulation materials. r" Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. SCOPE: Description: The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, terminations and identification for wiring systems rated 600 volts and less. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. Routing of Wire and Cable: Wire and cable routing shown on the Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): i Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections. No. 8 and larger shall ,., be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. b CONDUCTORS 16120-1 I Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN or THWN-2 insulation, temperature rated 90 degrees C, unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THWN-2. Feeder circuits shall be Type THWN-2. �. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN-2 conductors, temperature rated 90 degrees C, for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. Manufacturers: Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda, Simplex or approved equivalent. JOINTS AND SPLICES: Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. COLOR CODING: General: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. Neutral and Grounding Conductors: Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. ` 208 Volt System: Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: General: Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WIRE PULLING: Preparation: Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. CONDUCTORS 16120-2 Pulling Lines: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach r pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to C conductors. Multiple Wires in a Raceway: All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in simultaneously. Cable Lubricant: Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound for building wire No. 4 and larger. All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. Existing" Conduit: Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new conductors. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): General: Install conductors as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and the NECA "Standard of Installation. " Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or `3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. Dedicated Neutrals: Where indicated on the drawings, branch circuits shall be installed with dedicated neutrals in a single conduit. Wiring at Outlets and Switches: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet and wall switch. Terminations: Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque -tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. Different voltages in same raceway: Power and Lighting circuits of different system voltages (e.g. 208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts) shall not occupy the same conduit. CONDUCTORS 16120-3 I' Emergency Lighting and Power Conductors: Run in conduits separate from all other wiring. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with rubber tape, and friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of insulating putty. Wet Locations: Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. Identifying Labels: Adhesive vinyl cloth or vinyl self -laminating adhesive labels; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. Securely fasten labels to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, outlet boxes, wireways, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without -a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the cable manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS 7 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. SCOPE: Description: Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National ElectricalCode) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, General Electric, Leviton, Pass and Seymour are also acceptable. Specification Grade: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. WALL SWITCHES (20 Ampere): 20 Ampere Wall Switches: For all loads: 1. Single pole wall switch: Hubbell HBL1221. r.. 2. Three-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1223. t WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 RECEPTACLES: 20 Ampere Receptacles: 1. Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell No. 5362 (NEMA 5-20R). 2. Ground Fault Current Interrupter: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex _ with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GF-5362 (NEMA 5-20R). WEATHERPROOF DEVICES: Duplex Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. 5206WO. GFCI Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. WPFS26. FLUORESCENT WALL DIMMER SWITCH: Fluorescent Wall Dimmer Switch: Modular dimmer switches compatible with dimmer ballasts. Provide with trim potentiometer to adjust low -end dimming. Dimmer -ballast combination shall be capable of consistent dimming to a maximum of 10 percent of full brightness. Lutron Nova-T Series NTF with Lutron Hi -lime dimming ballasts. COMMUNICATION DEVICES: r Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Coverplates will be furnished by the Telephone Company. Where an outlet is shown, and it does not receive a telephone instrument, install a blank coverplate. Data Cable Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Install coverplate with 19/32" hole with bushing. COVERPLATES: General: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. Plastic For Flush Mounted Devices: All coverplates shall be plastic plates to match devices which they cover. Sierra Electric Corporation "P-Line" or approved equivalent. Weatherproof Devices: Die cast aluminum with spring loaded gasketed covers to close automatically when plugs are removed. Stainless steel springs. UL listed for use in damp locations and wet locations, cover closed. Orient device to maintain watertightness. Sierra 4500 series or approved equivalent. WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 r PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: Outlet Boxes: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural elevations. Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural baseboard j height. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. Floor Boxes: Verify floor box locations and that floor boxes are adjusted properly. Circuit Wiring: Verify that -branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. PREPARATION: Outlet Boxes: Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. Clean debris from outlet boxes. INSTALLATION: General: Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install devices plumb and level. Switches: Install switches with OFF position down. Wall Dimmers: Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. Receptacles: Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. Coverplates: Install wall plates when painting is complete. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. Adjacent Devices: Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Wiring Devices: Inspect each wiring device for defects. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. GFCI RECEPTACLES: General: At each GFCI receptacle location shown on the drawings install an actual GFCI receptacle as indicated. No "feed-thru" protection of GFCI receptacles shall be allowed. r WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 r- ADJUSTING: General: Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: Inside Coverplate: At each wiring device identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected in indelible ink. Outside Coverplate: At each wiring device, install a label on the outside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. MOUNTING HEIGHTS: General: Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. 1. Wall Switch: 48". 2. Receptacle: 18". 3. Telephone and Data Outlet: 18". 4. Wall Dimmer Switch: 48". END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES r.. 16140-4 r i SECTION 16180 - EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND 'WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate f'^ application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. SCOPE: Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawingsand/or as specified herein. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. Location of Equipment: Verify locations of equipment and location of electrical connections prior to +►� installation. Equipment locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of equipment and electrical connections. EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-1 COORDINATION: General: Coordinate work under provisions of the General Requirements. Obtain and review shop i drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. Determine connection locations and requirements. Sequence of Construction: Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ELECTRICAL MATERIALS: General: Provide electrical equipment and materials as specified under other sections of this Specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Connections: Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. Thermostats: Verify the location of all thermostats in the field. EOUIPMENT WIRING: General: Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing, kitchen, laundry and laboratory equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications. Locations: Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. .; Disconnect Switches: Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect _. switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: General: Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-2 i PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT: General: Connect each packaged air conditioning equipment with a fused disconnect switch mounted on the unit or on a wall adjacent to the unit. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: Manufacturer's Instructions: Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. Connections: Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. Wiring: Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. Receptacles: Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is required by the manufacturer. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is indicated. Strain Relief. Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. Devices: Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated or as required. Interconnections: Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated or required. END OF SECTION 16180 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-3 r k I SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. SCOPE: ii Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing identification of electrical materials, equipment and installations. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. r- UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NAMEPLATES AND LABELS: Nameplates: Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white r' core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature 1 on the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings. t" r Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles. WIRE MARKERS: Description: Adhesive vinyl cloth or self laminating vinyl adhesive labels. Thomas & Betts Type WBC, WES or approved equivalent. Pre-printed, type -written or field printed is acceptable. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1 I' Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, switchboard gutters, pull boxes and wireways. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as actually installed. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION: Cleaning: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. APPLICATION: Equipment: Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. Underground Conduit: Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 12 inches below finished grade. EOUIPMENT: General: All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Panelboards. CONTROL DEVICES: _ General: All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served. All electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Disconnect Switches. END OF SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-2 l G 4� i SECTION 16441 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. - SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide switch ratings, enclosure type and dimensions. Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. SCOPE: Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of disconnect switches on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. Location of Disconnect switches: Verify locations of disconnect switches prior to installation. Disconnect switches are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-1 r k PART 2 - PRODUCTS DISCONNECT SWITCHES: Description: NEMA KS1, Type HD heavy duty, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle _ lockable in OFF position. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. Enclosures: Provide disconnect switches in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class RK1 fuses. Auxiliary Poles: Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. -- Manufacturers: Switches shall be of General Electric, Westinghouse or Square D manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. TUMBLER SWITCHES: Description: Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Installation: Install disconnect switches level and plumb. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NECA "Standard of Installation." Connections: Connect disconnect switches to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as instructed by the manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A. END OF SECTION 16441 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-2 r 6 r. r SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, 'apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors. Field Test Reports: Submit for review Contractor's Field Tests of installation. Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. SCOPE: Description: Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: General: Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS CONDUCTORS: t- Material: Stranded copper as specified in Section 16120 - CONDUCTORS. r,,,,, GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-1 Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 (NEC) requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION GROUNDING RACEWAYS: General: Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: General: Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. CONNECTIONS: General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. Terminations: Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or to values specified in UL 486A and 486B. Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor. END OF SECTION 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-2 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified r herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication. Drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices, dimensions, gauges and type of construction !" of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to e determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. SCOPE: Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. Main Panelboard: The building main panelboard shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." 7 PANELBOARDS 16470-1 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of panelboards on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Deliver panelboards in factory fabricated water resistant wrapping. Protect panelboards from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and finish. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. Location of Panelboards: Verify locations of panelboards prior to installation. Panelboards are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete electrical distribution system. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of panelboards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PANELBOARDS: Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. Cabinets shall be rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. Cabinet fronts shall be cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X or 12 as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Cabinet Doors: Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. Provide with metal directory frame mounted inside each panel door. Cabinet Finish: All back boxes shall be galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. PANELBOARDS 16470-2 Multiple Sections: Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. Branch Circuits: Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. Copper Panelboard Bus: Provide each panelboard with copper busbars. Provide each panelboard with a separate equipment copper grounding bus bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide panelboards with an isolated copper grounding bus bar insulated from the panelboard cabinet. CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: Branch Circuit Breakers: 1. Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip: Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. LOADCENTERS: General: Circuit breaker load center, with bus ratings as indicated. Minimum integrated short circuit rating shall be 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical. Manufacturers: Circuit Breaker Loadcenters shall be of General Electric, Square D, Cutler -Hammer or Challenger manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Powermark Plus circuit breaker loadcenters. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Plug in circuit breakers as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. Enclosure: General Purpose or Rainproof as required. Flush or Surface as shown on the drawings with door, and pull ring and latch on door. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, NECA "Standard of Installation", and the manufacturer's written instructions. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. PANELBOARDS 16470-3 r" Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. Filler Plates: Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. Circuit Directory: Provide a neatly typewritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Identify branch circuits with room numbers to match those finally posted on doors. Cover directory with transparent sheet _ plastic. Circuit Labels: Provide engraved plastic nameplate to identify the circuits on each distribution panelboard. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates on each panelboard to identify the panelboard name, voltage and upstream power source. Spare Conduits: Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE. Grounding: Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16450. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. ADJUSTING: Load Balancing: Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 10 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS 16470-4 r SECTION 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time -current curves. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include all operation and maintenance manuals. SCOPE: Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: General: Provide maintenance materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Fuse Pullers: Provide two fuse pullers. CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT DEVICES 16475-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS MOLDED CASE THERMAL MAGNETIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Description: NEMA AB 1, molded case, one, two and three pole, with integral thermal and _ instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, UL listed. Two and three pole circuit breakers with common trip and single operating handle. Handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Circuit breakers shall have the voltage and trip rating scheduled or indicated on the Drawings. Operation: Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle indication. Trip Elements: Thermal magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C. ambient temperature. Terminations: Terminations for 10-30 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60 degree C. or 75 degree C. conductors. Terminations for breakers 35 ampere and greater shall be UL listed for use with 75 degree C conductors. Interrupting Rating: Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Where indicated on the drawings provide molded case circuit breakers with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 rms amperes symmetrical let -through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. Breakers 250 Amp Frame and Greater: Circuit breakers with frame sizes greater than 250 amperes shall have adjustable magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment, push to trip button and reverse connection capability. Switching Duty: UL listed SWD for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere single pole, suitable for 120 volts ac fluorescent loads. HACR Listing: UL listed as HACR type, 120/240 volt, 15-60 ampere, one, two and three pole, to serve heating air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. Accessories: Provide circuit breakers with switching neutral, shunt .trip, ground fault current interrupters, or remote controlled operators as scheduled on the drawings. Motor Circuit Protectors: Where indicate on the Drawings or Specified elsewhere provide molded case circuit breaker with integral instantaneous magnetic trip element in each pole. END OF SECTION 16475 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT DEVICES 16475-2 FSECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS: General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Include manufacturer's catalog data and drawings on all interior and exterior lighting fixtures with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire "Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled. +^ Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of r^ finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect/Engineer for every type fixture. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. SUBSTITUTIONS: General: Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer's name and catalog number, it has been done in order to establish a standard. Any substitution to the scheduled lighting fixture shall be of equal or better quality. No substitution shall be made without the review of the engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit sufficient data for review by the Engineer. If requested by the engineer, the contractor shall provide samples of each proposed substitution for review. Should a substitution be unacceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting fixture. PRE -APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS: ( General: All requests for substitute lighting fixtures shall be submitted to the Engineer no fewer than ten calendar days prior to the bid opening. The substitution proposal shall be bound, manufacturer's catalog data in alphabetical order by Fixture Type, and a cross index clearly indicating all proposed substitutions. Engineer's review is only to establish the suitability of the manufacturer and the fixture series. If approved by the Engineer, the substitution shall be listed in an addendum. The substituted r.. fixtures are still subject to Engineer's review as described elsewhere in this section. r— LIGHTING 16500-1 i CATALOG NUMBERS: General: All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. SCOPE: Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING: General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to the Conditions of the Contract and — Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of lighting fixtures on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect lighting fixtures from degradation by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Lighting fixtures shall remain in factory protective shipping cartons until installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Locations: The drawings are schematic and only indicate the approximate location of lighting fixtures. The precise location of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with the architectural reflected ceiling plan and other architectural features. Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Verify that there will be sufficient headroom for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures prior to ordering lighting fixtures. Verify ceiling system type and provide suitable plaster ring or frame if required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES: General: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar .— usage. LIGHTING 16500-2 7, I ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS: General: Electronic ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or integrated electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a minimum power factor of 95 % and an maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.6. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be 10 % maximum. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output with input voltage variations of plus or minus 25%. Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18, for non -consumer equipment. Ballasts for T8 Rapid Start Lamps: Ballasts shall have the following maximum ANSI input watts when used with F32T8 "Octron" lamps. Ballasts shall be Advance Mark V "IC", Magnetek Triad HP or approved equivalent. 1. Three Lamp: 95 watts. ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS: Description: Electronic dimming ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or integrated electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a minimum power factor of 95 % and an maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.6. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be 10% maximum. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output with input voltage variations of plus or minus 25%. Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line transients r- as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18, for non -consumer equipment. Ballasts shall dim continuously between 100% and 20% light output. Controls: Provide wall mounted control units designed to be used in conjunction with the electronic dimming ballast. Manufacturers: Electronic fluorescent dimming ballasts shall be Lutron Eco-10, Presclite Intellect or approved equivalent. FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY: Rapid Start Lamps: Emergency fluorescent power supplies shall consist of a high -temperature, maintenance -free nickel cadmium battery, a charger, and electronic circuitry in one case. Provide a J solid-state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery, and a double pole test switch. The emergency ballast shall be capable of operating one 40 watt T8 or T12 lamp a minimum of 90 minutes producing a minimum of 1100 lumens. The unit shall consume 4 watts of input power and have 24 watt-hour battery capacity. The unit shall be UL listed for installation either inside or on top of the fixture, warranted for five years from date of purchase. r LIGHTING 16500-3 4 ACRYLIC LENSES: 0.125 Inch Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. Only KSH brand lenses shall be acceptable. PROTECTIVE SHIELDS FOR BARE LAMPS: Protective Shields: Where open tube lamps are installed in food preparation areas, provide approved plastic shields over the tubes. FLUORESCENT LAMPS: General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or as required by the lighting fixture manufacture; Philips, General Electric, Sylvania or pre -approved equivalent. T-8 3500K: Rapid start, T-8, 4100K, 32 watt, 2850 initial lumens, 82 CRI, 20000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips F32T8/TL835. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached according to manufacturer's written instructions. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by the use of four UL listed clips. Support luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling grid. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. Fixtures Mounted to Exposed Grid: Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure, otherwise use bolts or screws to secure fixture to ceiling grid. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. Wall Mounted Fixtures: Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled. Coordinate the locations with architectural wall elevations and with architectural features. Exit Signs: Install surface mounted exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. LIGHTING 16500-4 7 Accessories: Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. Connections: Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Lamps: Install specified lamps in each luminaire. Firestopping: Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. REUSED FIXTURES: General: Where existing lighting fixtures are to be relocated, carefully remove and store the fixture. When it is ready to be hung, thoroughly wash all dirt and dust from the fixture and lens, hang the fixture and install new lamps. Should any such fixtures be damaged in this process replace them with matching new ones at no cost to the owner. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: General: Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. ADJUSTING: General: Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated or as directed. Exit Signs: Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. CLEANING: General: Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Clean finishes and touch up damage. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK: General: Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-5 f